Home

Brother J825DW Printer User Manual

1. The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What s wrong with this 2 Sz EA A The belt is twisted across the body You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it 1 19 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle 1 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is
2. What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Restraint System Check 0 eeeeeeeeeeee Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1 48 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 51 Front Seats Manual Seats This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold them up and down You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving 1 2 Move the lever located under the front of a manual seat up to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place Power Seats If your vehicle has this feature there will be a control on the outboard side of the front seat s Horizontal Control Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge of the control Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole control toward the front or the rear of the vehicle Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers the whole seat Verti
3. seeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 78 Care of Your CDS sorire arra EEan 3 77 Radio with Cassette and CD 3 51 Radio with CD cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 41 Radio with Six Disc CD ceeeeeeeeee es 3 61 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems RDS aaeeea 3 37 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems RDS 3 37 Theft Deterrent cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 3 75 Understanding Reception cece eee 3 76 RDS Messages i e 3 45 3 55 3 66 Rear Axle ccsiticisecsceseidi a E Aa EE EN ERAN 5 49 LOCKING 2 srescetsicteneantincdentncttonnautaaaaractetacurnagens 4 8 Rear Door Security LOCKS eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Rear Seat Operation cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 1 7 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 23 Rear Seat Passengers Safety Belts 1 23 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming 2 31 Rearview Mirrors 2 2 c ecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Reclining Seatbacks cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 1 4 Recreational Vehicle Towing seeeeeeeeees 4 42 Remote Keyless Entry System eseeeeeeeeee 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 2 4 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenees 5 87 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 005 5 82 Removing Wheel Covers
4. ee 4 54 Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches eeeeeeeeeeeeee es 4 56 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use 005 5 14 What to Add is scscsciunieetiastetelsieseeccseedonen eisau 5 40 What to Do with Used Oil 2 2 0 0 ceeeeeeeeee neers 5 17 What to Use ssrin 5 24 5 37 5 38 5 50 5 52 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 0 5 78 Replacement w2 siciizetced lest caste densatteeee dates 5 78 When to Add Engine Oil a se 5 14 When to Change Engine Oil eceeeeeeeeeees 5 16 When to Check scen renerisirs leenena beens 5 73 When to Check and Change Lubricant 5 49 5 51 When to Check and Change the Automatic Transmission Fluid sesiis 5 20 When to Check Power Steering Fluid 5 37 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 18 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking ona Hill ccc nee csiteeeneieneneeeetencees 4 60 Where to Put the Restraint eee ees 1 36 Why Safety Belts Work cee 1 9 15 Window Lockout 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 MING OWS c7cc cs ances a potadene EA 2 11 Manual ceisir eeaeee eoe 2 12 POWT car e E e 2 12 Sliding REAM sosise n inei 2 13 Windshield Washer ET D E E E A E aeears cert 5 38 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check 6 25 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 59 FUSES cerren aenn oi
5. 0 ccccceeeeeeeteeeeeeees 7 5 Service Publications Ordering Roadside Assistance Program SEEE TIE TATRA 7 6 IPORPMATION sos ced dachesct tek aei abae 7 11 Courtesy Transportation ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeen tees 7 7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Records 0 eceeeeeeeeeee sees 7 9 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 222 1020 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French 7 2 We encourag
6. eceeeeeeeneeeeeneee ees 1 23 Right Front Passenger Position 5 1 21 Safety Belt Extender ccceceeeeeneeeeeeeees 1 26 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 20 Safety Belts Are for Everyone eeeeeeees 1 8 Safety Chains ssi2scsestoske t roait REEE e 4 56 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0 ceeeeeeeeee ees iii Scanning the Terrain ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeenes 4 17 Seats Head Restraints 2c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 Heated Seats svi sade hissdescscardivceess cesses 1 4 Manual oa e E EEE 1 2 Power Lumbat ssssccetiriesiinkt ienes kar 1 3 Power Seats nieims eienn aE E E E 1 3 Rear Seat Operation c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Reclining Seatbacks ceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 12 Securing a Child Restraint Center Seat Position ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 43 Designed for the LATCH System 05 1 41 Rear Outside Seat Position eeeeeeeee 1 41 Right Front Seat Position ceeeeeeeeee eee 1 44 Securty Ligi ireira ra Ma aG i oie 3 34 Security While You Travel eeeeeeeeeeee teen ees 7 6 Selecting the Right Schedule Maintenance 6 5 SEVICE 2 22 saaee cons a E cotautanamee EN 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your VGNICIG ci siereetaxisedehnsess ienr NE 5 4 Doing Your Own Work ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeees 5 3 Engine Soon LiQht ss
7. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and other vehicle occ
8. Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of Park P on page 2 28 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see f You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 40 NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting our of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing may damage the transmi
9. 5 98 Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 102 Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can ge ap prov leaning products from your dealer See Matorlatd on page 5 102 Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non
10. Don t do this or Don t let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice will tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols used on your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics e Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 e Features and Controls in Section 2 e Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 e Climate Controls in Section 3 e Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in Section 3 e Audio System s in Section 3 e Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE
11. How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 5 73 Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See on page 5 75 and Wheel Replacemen on page 5 78 for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel w
12. Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward eligible aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The offer is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility see your GM dealer or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program Security While You Travel 1 800 CHEV USA 243 8872 As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance program This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
13. PCV Valve CV769C 4300 Engine 6487532 41 932 Spark Plugs 25162556 Windshield Wiper Blades 20 inches 51 cm Length Trico Type ACDelco Part No GM Part No 6 34 Engine Drive Belt Routing 6 35 Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service and any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer F Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Goa i Maintenance Record 6 38 Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects eee 7 10 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 0 0 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects to the Online Owner Center c eceeceeeeeeeneeeeeees 7 3 United States Government 0 eee 7 10 Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Telephone TTY Users 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Canadian Government 0c eceeeeeeeeeees 7 11 Customer Assistance Offices cccccceeeee 7 4 Reporting Safety Defects to GM Mobility Program for Persons General Motors 0cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 with Disabilities
14. c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 86 Replacement Bulbs ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 58 Replacing Brake System Parts n 5 43 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash dsdiencscsvniet atvaeiceannciess decteces 1 54 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government 0ceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 7 11 General Motors ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 United States Government cceeeeeeee ees 7 10 Restraint System Check 0cceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 26 Checking Your Restraint Systems 0 08 1 54 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash sci dicie tacanacmd sa a ani 1 54 Restraint Systems CHECKING imaisee aa 1 54 Replacing PariS ccc tscacucancicoetnenarebananenctecatacens 1 54 Retained Accessory Power RAP ccce 2 17 Right Front Passenger Position Safety Belts 1 21 Roadside Assistance Program eceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenees 7 6 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out 05 4 40 Routing Engine Drive Belt a an 6 35 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked 2 30 Safety Belt Reminder LIGMt iccccrieccsecetecsesie cganatastaceiearadias 3 25 Safety Belts Care Of ssc ciacctsel ae ETE E S ai 5 97 Center Passenger Position eseeeeeeeees 1 21 Driver POSION nsssvtteatirived Nietnndiarandiveretk 1 14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 12 Rear Seat Passengers
15. cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eee EARE 3 25 Off Road ReCOVETY cccceceeeeeteneee eee eeaeeaeeaes 4 11 Oil ENJE einion eana EE 5 13 Pressure Gage ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeee eee een inni 3 33 Older Children Restraints cccccceeeeeees 1 27 One Piece Composite Headlamp System 5 53 Online Owner Center 0c cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 7 3 Operating Your All Wheel Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads esida E 4 14 Operation roren ine a aa E AEA 3 19 Other Warning Devices ceeceeeeeeeeeeee een eees 3 5 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 32 Outlet Adjustment cece eee eee eects eee een eters 3 21 Part E Maintenance Record n a 6 36 Outside PASSING 2 2is6 lt 2s siievessciievessossivereesaseensacsee ss 4 11 4 58 CONVEX MINOT igrasxecsenaseceeteaccataniessatatnsacontey 2 32 PasslOCk ccccccccccccsssssseseeeecsceeeaesnssereeeees 2 15 Heated MINONS coi cccctstivertenigeedscbeceeeedentaredant 2 33 Payload sikanata i na ai 4 48 Manual MUO sicsmctsciececceradentedsnemisseimanseoredaen 2 31 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab 00058 4 51 Power MItOls scsscsccgascotnsmetsaananad iorn e 2 32 Plan Ahead When Possible eeeeeeeenee ees 7 7 Overhead Console cseceseeeeeeeeeaeeaeeneeaees 2 33 Playing a Cassette Tape cceeeeeeeeeneeeeen eee 3 56 Overseas Customer Assistance 6 06eeeee 7 5 Playingsa CDn soe
16. e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping e Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers e Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts e What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out e Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Do not use more power than you need because you do not want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you
17. 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 5 77 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s res
18. 5 Pull the bulb out 6 Push the new bulb into the socket 7 Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks in place 8 Reinstall the assembly Install and tighten the screws 9 Close the tailgate 5 58 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear_and cracking See Wiper Blade Check under At Least Twice a Yean on page 6 26 Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 34 Notice Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield 1 To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position A Blade Assembly D Blade Pivot B Arm Assembly E Hook Slot C Locking Tab F Arm Hook 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly 5 59 4 To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D notched e
19. Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position e The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P e The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing Transmission Park P Mechanism Check downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only When you are doing this check your vehicle e To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability could begin to move You or others could be With the engine running shift to PARK P Then injured and property could be damaged Make release the parking brake followed by the regular sure there is room in front of your vehicle in brake case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the Underbody Flushing Service regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect 6 29 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed a
20. hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section bie to ve Maintenance Schedule to determi heck r brake fluid See Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6 30 5 39 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 5 40 What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 32 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice Brake Wear e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your Disc brake pads have built in wear in
21. your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED or MAX Each higher setting will allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use automatic volume select OFF 3 62 RCL Recall Press this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time Pressing this knob with the ignition off will display the time For XM 48 contiguous US states if equipped press the RCL knob while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY Channel Number Channel Name To change the default on the display press the RCL knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until the display flashes The selected display will now be the default Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 48 contiguous US states if equipped The display will show your selection TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations kK SEEK gt Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there The radio will seek only to sta
22. 5 105 Windshield Wiper 0e eeeeeeeeeeeee entrees 5 105 Gage Check Gages Warning Light 3 35 Engine Coolant Temperature 0 28 3 29 E E E E E E E 3 35 Qil PreSSUre cesieveceortetescierst derici sarsi igr a enia 3 33 SPCCCOMEIEN cicsspecccvesseceeetadcecctneenteceencadienes 3 25 TACNOMEICE sv tcowsseecctveatawcdeanieeessenics ekteedae dies 3 25 Voltmeter Gage cceceeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeaeeaeeaes 3 27 Garment HOOKS cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 2 40 Gasoline OGCUANG E wisetsdedineebeinesdeetlaeeeds 5 4 Specifications osien iane a an ao 5 5 Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving 4 16 GIOVE BOX cacion tane e EE 2 33 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disablliti S cscs tesleiteeteacaveuegeeiivtieeasea e E eSa 7 5 Hazard Warning Flashers eeceeeeeeee seer eee 3 4 Head Restraints w iccccecidecancnestcunmeviesereceneaseenes 1 6 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 655 3 7 FO AGIAMDS cicio E 5 53 Bulb Replacement ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea ees 5 52 Electrical System ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee eenes 5 104 Halogen BUDS ciecii ccccsestcecetetiecnesnerteneennnenns 5 52 One Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 55 Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 56 Heated Seats ccsitciackveaieiiar eaaciveeiavee 1 4 Highway Hypnosis eceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee eee eeeees 4 33 Hill and Mountain Roads ee 4 34 F
23. An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Q If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 12 54 000 Miles 90 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pat
24. But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you have left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes are not marked Curves are not banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you have gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that is why it is very important that you read this guide You will find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving If you do not know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier it
25. C or lower the display will toggle between the ICE and the current temperature every eight seconds This is a warning to the drive that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken 2 38 The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However if C Calibration is displayed the compass will need to be calibrated You may also place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing the holding the MODE and US MET buttons at the same time while in the COMP TEMP mode After about 10 seconds the compass will display C and you can release the buttons Drive the vehicle in a complete 360 circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph 8 km h and the compass will function normally Once the calibration is complete the display will return to a compass reading Variance is the different between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location 1 2 Find your location on the zone map Record your zone number Press and hold both the MODE and the US MET buttons in the COMP TEMP mode After five seconds the compass will acknowledge the variation mode by displaying the current zone number When it does release both buttons 4 Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display
26. Canada similar VOLTS Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip odometer button You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero To view the trip odometer press the button near the readout To reset the trip odometer hold the button until it resets Tachometer The tachometer if equipped displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more JA If the driver s belt is already buckled ne
27. Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflated to the correct_pressures Do not forget to check your spare tire See Tires on page 5 67 for further details Cassette Tape Player Service Clean cassette tape player Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio System s on page 3 36 for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield
28. When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 32 5 52 Bulb Replacement See Replacement Bulbs on page 5 58 for the proper types of bulbs to use For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your GM dealer s service department Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps One Piece Composite Headlamp System 1 Open the hood 5 Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly 6 Put the new bulb into the bulb assembly and reinstall it in the headlamp assembly by turning it clockwise until it is tight 7 Plug in the electrical connector 2 Remove the black Telaier clips by Iting up 8 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle S FUNTE headampassemo youl 9 Install the two retaining clips 4 Unplug the electrical connector 46 Close the hood Two Piece Composite Headlamp System 1 Open the hood 5 Turn th
29. a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables Transfer Case and Front Axle Four Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation More frequent lubrication may be required on off road use Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking 6 31 Part D Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid Lubricant j GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part Lubricants a re No U S 89021184 in Canada Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part 89021186 number or specification may be obtained from your Automatic DEXRON II
30. bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 5 76 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare if you have one It was developed for use on your vehicle If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
31. ceceeeeeeeeeee teers 3 61 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems RDS oaeee 3 37 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems RDS eeeee 3 37 Audio System s cont Theft Deterrent Feature Understanding Radio Reception 0 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System Automatic Headlamp System Automatic Transmission PUIG eateries ar aside E EE A A E Operation 2 cccees exevesncsevseceeceieeteecsartesacaetere ss Automatic Transmission Check 02 0e0ee0e Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System CheCK ss ccivesecstveasteciiacdressterteaeieesnes Backing Up sueis fetiehetenndedleclia caceheel aean Battery croea a a E A E Battery Replacement c ceeceeeeeeeeseee eens Battery Rundown Protection Bed Rails Before Leaving on a Long Trip Before You Go Off Roading eeeeeeeeeeeees Body Lubrication Service cceeeeeeeneeeeeeeees Brake PARKING adean menan a Reesdaradars System Inspection System Warning Light a Brake Adjustment eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Brake FUG risien sanaa i eE Brake Pedal Travel Brake Wear 2 Brakes he leaa rea a AN 5 39 BraKING 2 ccaasa2 man Aa aiemn sence 4 6 Braking in Emergencies cceeeeeeeeeeee een ee eee 4 8 Break In New Vehicle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 16 Bulb Replacement eceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 52 Center High Mounted S
32. e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in ess than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips e Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior e Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently e If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 33 Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are some tips that can make e Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads e Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine d
33. in the city or travel the open road Chevrolet s Roadside Assistance toll free number is staffed by courteous and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year We will provide the following services during the Bumper to Bumper warranty period at no expense to you e Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel 5 maximum for the customer to get to the nearest service station e Lock out Service identification required Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered within 10 miles e Emergency Tow Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling accident Assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand mud or snow e Flat Tire Change Installation of a spare tire will be covered at no charge The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure e Jump Start No start occurrences which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge e Dealer Locator Service In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Chevrolet s Bumper to Bumper warranty However when other services are utilized our Roadside Assistance Representatives will explain any payment obligations you might incur For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide th
34. of your vehicle e The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down slower Remote Oil Filter Four Wheel Drive The access door for the remote oil filter is in the steering linkage shield assembly located under the radiator support Turn the screw to unlock or lock the door Make sure if you open the door it is securely closed when you are finished What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal
35. ona a A 5 10 Rear AXE esscncochottcecttecotigun coeneecteneceees 5 49 Four Wheel Drive oa cece eee eccee cece ea eeeee ees 5 50 FROM AXE ccisinicceieccceucs stgeddderacemeneieainvetens 5 51 Bulb Replacement ccccccccceceseceeeeeeees 5 52 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 59 TES _ civieeiecindaoasen aE eu dominecdacdeleeceeves 5 61 Appearance Care oo eeeecceccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeues 5 94 Vehicle Identification oo eee ee eee eee 5 103 Electrical System oo eee eeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 104 Capacities and Specifications 5 111 Maintenance Schedule c0 cecscesseesseeeeeeees 6 1 Maintenance Schedule ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 2 Customer Assistance and Information 7 1 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects ooo eceeeeeeeee ees 7 10 WHO OK so ieee leek Jokes he a E E aE E EN 1 mj CHEVADLET GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CHEVROLET the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name S10 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be the
36. this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 15 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you will want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different skills Here is what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds
37. vehicle control e What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they will not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control Q Are there some things should not do when driving down a hill A Yes These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you do not drive straight down e Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed down in a manual shift This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade 4 21 gt Am likely to stall when going downh
38. 1 Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The children or others could be badly injured or even killed Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children This vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition and door locks It will fit with either side up When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you ll be able to have new ones made easily using this number Your dealer should also have this number Notice If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance on page 7 6 Remote Keyless Entry System If equipped the keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cau
39. 37 Top Strap Anchor Location eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 38 Torque LOCK assire eaor e a e eed cares 2 28 Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires 4 55 Towing Recreational Vehicle sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 42 TOWING amp Waller cosson cates eee echeteeneck tees eeentes 4 51 YOU V hICIC eeisucesesedsctssertie nnee rei 4 42 Trailer Recommendations eeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 4 51 Trailer Brake craic canctcaiinatece e eene aai 4 57 14 Transfer Case cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 2 23 5 50 Transfer Case and Front Axle Four Wheel Drive Inspection a se 6 31 Transmission Fluid AUtOMAtic cccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneaeeeees 5 20 Transmission Operation Automatic 2 20 Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual s cssctccciecesdeseenee od nonen 7 11 Transportation Options cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 7 8 Traveling to Remote Areas ceceeeeeeeeeee eens 4 16 Trip OdOMC16F iisccasccdte crest ronche tev a 3 25 Truck Camper Loading Information 00 4 49 Turn and Lane Change Signals e eeeeeeees 3 6 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceceeeeeeeee ee 3 6 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer 4 58 Two Piece Composite Headlamp System 5 54 Two Tiered Loading cccseeeeeeeeeeeneeereeeerees 4 48 Underbody Flushing Service eeeeeeeeeee 6 2
40. Also see Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5 98 6 26 Spare Tire Check At least twice a year after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure make sure that the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather_more frequent application may be ee o page 6 32 Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See on page 5 20 A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Four Times a Year Tailgate Lubrication Service Lubricate tailgate latch bolt handle assembly pivot points and hinges with lubricant recommended in Part D At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body door and fuel door hinges latches and locks including the glove box and console doors the body hood secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl and any moving seat hardware Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivo
41. An Emission Control Service Q Rotate tires See ike neperaion and Parao on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 93 000 Miles 155 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Q Inspe
42. BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY THEN SECURE LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECT OCCUPANT 4 DO NOT TWIST SAFETY s BELT WHEN ATTACHING FASTEN SEAT AIR BAG BELTS MOVESEAT Nae DO NOT INSTALL Fury W _AREAR FACING gt REARWARD CHILD RESTRAINT SUE Yana IN THIS SEATING CHILD SEAT POSITION PULL BELT OUT COMPLETELY y5 e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING CHILD SEAT POSITION power k d winpow __ DOOR LOCK UNLOCK MASTER N s ENGINE LIGHTING O COOLANT SWITCH TURN SIGNALS PARKING LAMPS HAZARD WARNING FLASHER DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS 4 N I TEMP BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM COOLANT Peel ENGINE OIL ae se ANTI LOCK C BRAKES FUSE BOX ACCESS I ENGINE COOLANT FAN FUEL D OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE SERVICE MANUAL Model Reference This manual covers this model Crew Cab vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats eeke eee eee een eeaeeaeeaeeas 1 2 Manual Seats scc ccecsesecovascciesenssanesceescceanvese cheers 1 2 Powel Seats yeotenn dase a ER 1 3 Power Lumbar 5 sic cca Sawesd Bootiweslethesiace eS Ea 1 3 Heated Seats si sicstsiedtevees os iiaiai 1 4 Reclining Seatbacks ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee eenes 1 4 Head Restraints csce ccccscencsncaneticne nace tbeaeeueeedaats 1 6 Rear Seals noia tisaig
43. Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Usage Fluid Lubricant Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Hood and Door Hinges Fuel Filler Door and Folding Seats Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Hinges Latch Bolt and Linkage Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No U S 12346293 in Canada 992723 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 6 33 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer A1163C Air Cleaner Filter 95098463 Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24200796 i GF481 Fuel Filter 15050894 aoe PF47 Oil Filter 95010792
44. Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 24 000 Miles 40 000 km QO Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 m
45. I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly A As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash Is there anything might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end sheet metal or height they may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction rocedure on page 7 2 1 53 Restraint System Check Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also loo
46. If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door above the door latch or sao Conana Your Vod on page 4 42 Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue If you use a weight distributing hitch make sure you don t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow e If you use a step bumper hitch your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure you have ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper e If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving e If your vehicle has the bumper delete option do not bolt any type of hitch to the close out panel The close out panel will not support a hitch 4 55 Weight Dis
47. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 5 17 Engine Air Cleaner Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for Cleaner Filter more information on the location of the engine air Inspect the air cleaner filter every 15 000 miles 25 000 cleaner filter km and replace every 30 000 miles 50 000 km If x you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change 5 18 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To remove either engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 2 3 Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on and remove the cover Lift out the engine air cleaner filter if needed Insert a new air filter See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 34 to determine which filter to use 4 Reinstall the engine air cleaner filter cover Tighten the fasteners to hold the cover in place Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flame if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not dr
48. Press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds and the radio will produce one beep The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station SCAN will appear on the display Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets The radio will scan only to the preset stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 48 contiguous US states if equipped by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons The radio will produce one beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will be automatically stored for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 43 Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or to decrease The display will show the bass or the treble level If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To
49. Rearview Mirror If your vehicle has this feature the mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A photocell on the back of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses when headlamps are behind you At night when the glare is too high the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare This change may take a few seconds The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put into REVERSE R or when the glare is reduced AUTO Automatic Dimming This button is located at the base of the mirror Use it to turn on the automatic feature The button has an indicator light to show it is on OFF Press this button to turn the automatic feature off Time Delay The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to the day position This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic Cleaning the Photocells Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells and mirror face when necessary Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Outside Manual Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the side of your vehicle
50. Recreational Vehicle Towing s 41141111111s ris 4 42 Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Loading Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 42 WIGS seeriana EEEN 4 14 Truck Camper Loading Information 4 49 Driving at Night ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 26 Trailer Recommendations 0 c0eseseeeeeeees 4 51 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 48 4 27 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab 4 51 City DIVING wise cae kieeides touts wig a een as 4 30 TOWING a Trailer igisige nsspas 4 51 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts They Are fo on page 1 8 Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It is the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
51. System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts VOLTS When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning
52. The Truck Camper Loading label is located on the passenger s door near the latch It will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide in camper how much of a load your vehicle can carry and how to correctly spread out your load Also it will help you match the right slide in camper to your vehicle When the truck is used to carry a slide in camper the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer s camper weight figure the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer s camper weight figure the weight of camper cargo and the weight of passengers in the camper The total cargo load should not exceed the truck s cargo weight rating and the camper s center of gravity should fall within the truck s recommended center of gravity zone when installed The Cargo Weight Rating CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside But you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seating position The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information Label on the passenger s door for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity for the Cargo Weight Rating C is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and if suspe
53. With your arms hands feet and body you will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 16 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds e you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e you have less time to react e you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles e you will need more distance for braking especially since you are on an unpaved surface When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or
54. also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens 3 22 Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you ve used and many other things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically Base Level Cluster United States Canada similar 3 23 3 24 SERVICE ENGINE S gt SS i 2 a 0 RPM X 1000 APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARI PRN DBEA 888888 TRIP ODO TRIP HOLD TO RESET Uplevel Cluster United States
55. and the area beside and behind your vehicle from a comfortable driving position You can also fold the mirrors in before entering a car wash Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle Push the mirrors back out when finished 2 31 Outside Power Mirrors If your vehicle has this feature the controls are located on the driver s door armrest Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose the driver s or passenger s mirror then use the arrows located on the four way control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want the mirror to go Put the selector switch back in the center position when finished adjusting the mirror so that you don t accidentally bump into the control pad and get the mirror out of adjustment 2 32 Outside Convex Mirror A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Outside Heated Mirrors Your vehicle may be equipped with heated outside rearview mirrors The heated mirror button is located to the lower right of the mode knob on the climate control system The button has an indicator light to indicate if O the heated mirror feature is on or off When the heated mirror feat
56. and_gone flat See Compact Spare Tirejon page 5 94 and f a Tire Goes Fallon page 5 87 B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 94 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 42 E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 72 F Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only G Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines 5 67 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tir
57. approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 19 Q A 4 20 What should do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and can not make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here is what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you will need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It is best that
58. arrow or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD DISP Display Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display To change the default on the display track or elapsed time press the DISP knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep and the selected display will now be the default BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio 3 50 A EJT Eject Press this button to eject a CD Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed first CD Messages If CHECK CD appears on the display and the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smooth the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for an
59. as soon as you can before they set e Carefully scrape off any excess stain e Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn e Ifa ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Follow the directions on the container label 4 Apply cleaner with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean water dampened towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 5 95 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 If a stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking sold to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as fo
60. automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Inflation Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 72 5 70 Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see Your Vehicle on page 4 42 GAWR FRI A ght Rating for the front axle see Loading Your Vehicl
61. available from a station NO INFO will appear on the display TRAF Traffic If TRAF appears on the display the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements the radio will stop and TRAF will be displayed When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it If no station is found NO TRAF will appear on the display 3 55 If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF button to turn off the traffic announcements Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the volume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealer for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up You must return to the dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer 3 56 Playing a Cassette Tape You
62. between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off set the parking brake while the ignition is off Then start your vehicle The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamps when you need them You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp system See Daytime Running Lamps DRL later in this section for more information If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness Control under interior Lamps on page 3 15 Lamps On Reminder A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on the driver s door is opened and your ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCES
63. blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed With THEFTLOCK activated your radio will not operate if stolen 3 75 Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go XM Satellite Radio Service 48 Contiguous US States XM Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception from coast to coast Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to come and go Your radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference 3 76 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they are not they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLEAN to indicate that you have used your tape play
64. e Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running e With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P e With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P e Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps Sat The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment on page 5 12 for more information on location 5 21 The transmission dipstick handle has this symbol on it 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 3 To get an accurate reading when checking the fluid level keep the tip of the dipstick down to avoid the fluid traveling up the dipstick je j gt 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross hatched area for a hot check 5 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 22 How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule t kind of transm
65. every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 39 000 Miles 65 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 42 000 Miles 70 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level an
66. fluid could come out and fall on hot engine part or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving e When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C e At high speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather e While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows
67. forward or backward through the tape SEEK and a positive or a negative number will appear on the display BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape or a CD is playing The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening TAPE CD Press this button to play a tape or a CD when listening to the radio The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening A EJT Eject Press this button located to the right of the cassette tape slot to eject a tape Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first 3 57 Cassette Tape Messages CHK TAPE Check Tape If this message appears on the display the tape will not play because of one of the following reasons e The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly e The tape is broken Try a new tape e The tape is wrapped around the tape head Attempt to get the cassette out Try a new tape CLEAN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play ioe see aei es cle
68. hear a beep L and a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position end out of audio by waiting for the display to change to the time display Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep CEN will appear on the display Fade may not be available if you have a regular cab model 3 40 Radio Messages CAL Calibrated Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CAL appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealer for service LOC Locked This message is displayed when the Theftlock system has locked up Your vehicle must be returned to the dealer for service Radio with CD PWR a SEEK A scan gt Radio Data System RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS your radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio stati
69. instrument panel lights It is located on the driver s side of your instrument panel next to the exterior lamps control Turn the thumbwheel up to make your instrument panel lights brighter or down to dim them Turn the thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps Entry Lighting Your vehicle is equipped with an entry lighting feature When either front door is opened the dome lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry and all the front doors are closed or the front door handles are lifted and released the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will turn off automatically If you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle the interior lights will come on for a short time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition to help you see while exiting the vehicle These lights will stay on for a short period of time and then will go out if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position Front Map Lamps If your vehicle has front map lamps they are located in the overhead console The front map lights that are located on the inside rearview mirror will automatically come on for approximately 40 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter if equip
70. it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside m
71. letter LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z The light truck tire size example above shows dual or single tire configurations 5 69 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are
72. limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints constant velocity joint and brake pedal springs A good time_to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection on page 6 31 Drive axle service See Part D Recommended Fluid and Lubricants nd Lubricants on page 6 32 for proper lubricant to use Q Check fluid level and add fluid as needed Q f your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12
73. months whichever occurs first See footnote O Inspect engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional in
74. offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair TT Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide
75. outlets with a little air directed toward the floor vents ind Bi Level This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets then directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets A little air is also directed toward the windshield and the side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets ted Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield and the side window outlets 8 Fan Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the mode knob to OFF to turn off the fan The mode knob can also be used to select defog or defrost mode For more information see Defogging later in this section Temperature Knob Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the temperature on the inside of your vehicle When it s cold outside 0 F 18 C or lower use the engine coolant heater if equipped to provide warmer air faster to your vehicle An engine coolant heater warms the coolant that the engine uses to provide heat to warm the inside of your vehicle For more information see on page 2 19 A C Air Conditioning Turn the knob to the A C position to turn the air conditioning system on or off When the system is on this setting cools and dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and directs it through the floor outlets as w
76. provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the pump Canada Only California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 30 and your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly You should not have to add anything to your fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake v
77. pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL N Notice If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or in the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t needed This will avoid sparks and
78. safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things e The amount of alcohol consumed e The drinker s body weight e The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka It is the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level tha
79. should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for the life of this vehicle See Part B Owner Checks and Services on page 6 25 and Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6 30 Footnotes t The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints constant velocity joint and brake pedal springs A good time_to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection on page 6 31 Drive axle service See Part D Recommended Fluids andl Lubricants nd Lubricants on page 6 32 for proper lubricant to use e Check fluid level and add fluid as needed If driving in dusty areas or when towing a trailer drain fluid and refill every 15 000 miles 25 000 km e f your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change e More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy duty or off road use 3 000 Miles 5 000 km QO Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months
80. still tightened to the fender If tightening is required tighten by hand then with a wrench one quarter turn 3 78 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 48 Contiguous US States Your XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of your XM system Make sure that the XM satellite antenna is not obstructed Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Freeway Driving 0 cccceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 31 Defensive Driving cccccceceeeeeeeesereseeeeeees 4 2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip eeeeeeees 4 32 Drunken Driving siacedi niaii 4 2 Highway Hypnosis eeeeeeeee eres 4 33 Control of a Vehicle ceca sctscetce seston Mase snersaatend 4 5 Hill and Mountain Roads eee 4 34 BRAKING EEA Gehan eek hee AE ETS 4 6 Winter Driving cceeeeeeeereeeeeeteteenneeees 4 36 Locking Rear Axle cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 If You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Steering eiea a 4 9 IC OF SNOW 0 eeee eee eteeete eee e ipin E 4 40 Off Road Recovery cccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 4 11 OWING fic cect euena a E Er O E st 4 42 PASSING eseria a nenia sE 4 11 Towing Your Vehicle s ssesssesreeensrerrrrrrrren 4 42 Loss Of ConWOl crrr noenee 4 13
81. sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home ina cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle Braking Braking action involves percept
82. the coolant level in the radiator For information on how to add coolant to the radiator see on page 5 29 Radiator Pressure Cap Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperatur n your vehicle s instrument panel See Eng Temperature Gage on page 3 29 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty 5 27 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long per
83. the driver s door The parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go on If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds the remaining doors will unlock LOCK Press LOCK to lock all the doors Press LOCK again within three seconds and the horn will chirp Panic Alarm Press this button to make the horn sound and the headlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the panic button again waiting for 30 seconds or starting the vehicle Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery Notice Whe
84. the passenger s door If weight ratings are exceeded move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings If you want more information on curb weights cargo weights cargo weight rating and the correct center of gravity zone for your vehicle your dealer can help you Just ask for a copy of Consumer Information Truck Camper Loading Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for your vehicle Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or the GAWR You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer jon page 4 51 later in this section Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed However we recommend that conversions of this type not be done to pickups Owners should be aware that as manufactured there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety For specific information on this pickup contact GM Customer Assistance See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 4 Towing a Trailer If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer i
85. the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into FIRST 1 until the vehicle is going slowly enough Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Four Wheel Drive Your vehicle has four wheel drive You can send your engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the part that follows before using four wheel drive See Off Road Recovery on page 4 11 You should use two wheel high 2HI for most normal driving conditions Notice Driving on pavement in four wheel drive for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle s powertrain Do not drive in four wheel drive on pavement for extended periods of time Transfer Case The transfer case buttons are to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Use these buttons to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among three driving settings 2HI Two Wheel Drive High This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive When this light is turned on it is about one half as bright as the others 4HI Four Wheel Drive High Thi
86. the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Cruise Control With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off e Cruise control can be dangerous where you can not drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control If
87. there will be five Example 1 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of Loading Your Vehicle available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs E Vehicle C it ehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 TOGO IDS 153 K9 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Available Occupant and 399 Ibs 317 kg Consult this manual to determine how this reduces Cargo Weight the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailen on page 4 51 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 4 44 item Example 2 Loading Your Vehicle Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs 750 Ibs 340 kg 68 kg x 5 oe Cargo 250 Ibs 113 kg Example 3 Loading Your Vehicle Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 91 kg x5 Available Cargo Refer to your vehicle s tire loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seat
88. tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 72 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 42 Radial Ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall the bead The portion of a tire between the tread and Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 2 32 inch of tread remains See When f Is Time for New Tires on page 5 75 5 71 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality on page 5 77 Vehicle Capacity Weight T
89. to protect the Center Passenger Position mother When a safety belt is worn properly its more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position on page 1 14 The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again 1 21 Lap Belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug When you sit in the center seating position you have a Buckl iti dral it th the lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the Uce posIion And Ferease It me same way as Me tap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt is not long belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt enough sep Safely Balt Exiendeil on page 1 28 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 22 Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more ofte
90. turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may e Windshield Wipers be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn e Windshield Washer signal e Cruise Control e Flash to Pass Feature If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse See Fuses and Curt Breakers on page 5 105 and for burned out bulbs If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps a different turn signal flasher is used With this flasher installed the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass Feature This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn s
91. turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 32 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 33 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark coolant mixture up to the base of the filler 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but neck See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 for more leave the radiator pressure cap off information about the proper coolant mixture 5 34 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the engine cooling fan filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator the arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this filler neck ma
92. using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat Position Do not use a child restraint in this position The restraint will not work properly 1 43 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 2 al ae restraint is equipped with the LATCH elLower Anchorages and Top Tethers for aor LA a ystem on page 1 39 on page 1 37 if the child restraint has one Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat Here is why 1 44 A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat you will be using the lap s
93. vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 4 39 If You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 4 40 Notice Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information abo ing tire chains on your vehicle see on page 5 80 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If you have a four wheel drive vehicle shift into 4HI Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forw
94. warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in CAUTION Continued the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air baginflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an air bag deployment you should seek medical attention Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the system commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment 1 51 e Let only qualified technicians work on your air b
95. your vehicle has this feature the controls are CRUISE located on the end of OFF ON RA the turn signal multifunction a lever OFF Move the switch to this position to turn the cruise control off ON Move the switch to this position to turn the cruise control on R A Resume Accelerate Move the switch to this position to maintain a desired speed after braking SET Press this button at the end of the lever to set your desired speed 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from ON to R A Resume Accelerate You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at R A the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll
96. 0 Miles 83 000 km Q If you have not used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and therefore have not changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter 52 500 Miles 87 500 km QO Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whicheve occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 21 Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service I
97. 1 Transfer Case and Front Axle Four Wheel Drive Inspection 4 6 31 USING YOUN sigirini ooit ioa e ISERE 6 4 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Maintenance When Trailer Towing 000 4 60 MAKING TUTAS ccxscsscccstianncettcennimccheanitentiennteeca gees 4 58 Malfunction Indicator Light cece ees 3 30 Manual Seats c ccceceececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 2 Manual Windows 2 2 ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Manually Closing the Sunroof s es 2 43 Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle 2 5 Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance 0006 7 5 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview ee 2 31 Manual Rearview Mirror ceeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Outside Convex Mirror ceceeeeeeeeeee eres 2 32 Outside Heated Mirrors 0ceeceeeeeeeeeees 2 33 Outside Manual Mirror 0c0cceeeeeeee eres 2 31 Outside Power Mirrors 0 ceceeeeeeeeeee tees 2 32 Model Reference siis vcccsaccsasgerudevieetateneseigsceseesens vi MY GMEIRK COM i ascicceaseetascchatesscdnadsecaeeeebhctetmncuns 7 3 New Vehicle Break In ececeseeeeeeeeeee eee 2 16 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 34 Odometer ssor o shaded sted csnadsseeaiersiehs 3 25 Odometer Trip
98. 2004 Chevrolet S10 Owner Manual Cl Seats and Restraint Systems 006 1 1 Front Seats tecisiiconeduonedinaddaceaeevdloecuejuanzaads 1 2 Rear Seats scissa ancdstaee neaedorabtawonsaaieg 1 7 Safety Belts osc ceccisccatesadeeutn sssoncwerd widblase wvccs 1 8 Child Restraints oo ccceeceeeeeee eee eee eens 1 27 Air Bag System oo ccc cece eceeeeeeceeeeeenerees 1 47 Restraint System Check 0 cee eeee eee eee ee 1 54 Features and Controls 2 ceseeceeeeneeeeeeees 2 1 KeyS ccecstsacteiecks E EENE E A 2 2 Doors and Locks sssssiveeieeisse va sivad ea iin 2 6 A Viale 0 sacnsniisnecas anionini e areae arees 2 11 Theft Deterrent Systems oo eeeeee eee eee ees 2 13 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 16 Minors _ cesiers tie stcccact n a a aE 2 31 Storage Areas s snsneniunsnrinininrrrnrnrrrenne 2 33 SUMO errearen esne EE E REER 2 42 Instrument Panel cccccceseee sees sees sees eenees 3 1 Instrument Panel Overview uw eee 3 2 Climate Controls ooo ccccececcceceeee eee eee eens 3 18 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 22 Audio System S ooo cc cccec ccc ec kasieris 3 36 Driving Your Vehicle seeeeeeeeneeeee eens 4 1 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle _ 4 2 Towing Service and Appearance Care 00 5 1 SENICE aaraa rE a E 5 3 Fuel oeron ee a aa oira 5 4 Checking Things Under ihe Rood
99. 25 Shifting Into Park P It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are palliigia traller ees Towing a Trailean page 4 51 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this 2 26 Pull the lever toward you e Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regula
100. 3 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in your vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle page 4 42 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 54 The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum of 5 200 Ibs 2 361 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum of 5 200 Ibs 2 361 kg with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper
101. 3 7 Plat We esans a a E E 5 81 Flat Tire Changing ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 5 82 Fluid Automatic Transmission ceee 5 20 Power Steering ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee een ees 5 36 Windshield Washer ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 38 FM Stereo ce eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee een een een eed 3 76 Fog LAMPS sckiecaie te sec eu sas citeeisecldencdenskedndes ae 3 15 Following Distance ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 4 57 FOOINOLES iisiakacticicdesnacdhiasatanven tacneetteneedins 6 7 6 18 5 Four Wheel Drive ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 22 5 50 Front AXIO diserna canes a a A Ea 5 51 Front Map Lamps 2ccceccseieiess ocne aa 3 16 Front Storage Area oo ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 2 40 PUEL cen to eevie bes niticncaacidie dean vcce eth Mut i nai deena eaes 5 4 AOCIIVGS io co0 vcncsgcadandass inen aa inna Ei 5 6 California Fuel ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 5 9 Filling Your Tank 22 lt iicneietesecosnannvvedsecrtesethananeds 5 7 Fuels in Foreign Countries cceeeeeeeeee ee 5 6 Gage eres edits E a asi eek 3 35 Gasoline Octane cceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 4 Gasoline Specifications ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 5 Low Warning Light sesiis iuieniesy eniinn 3 36 System INSPeECtiON ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeneees 6 30 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers
102. 5 Press MODE to set your zone number Your variance is now set and the display will return to the COMP TEMP mode TRIP Once in the TRIP mode press the MODE button for the following trip functions AVG ECON Average Economy The average fuel economy since the last reset is displayed INST ECON Instantaneous Economy Instantaneous fuel economy for the last second of driving is displayed RANGE The display indicates the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of driving FUEL USED The fuel used since the last reset is displayed AVG SPEED Average Speed The average speed since the last reset is displayed To reset the trip computer press the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds All functions will be displayed briefly once the system is reset Reset can only be performed in the AVG ECON FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes All three modes are reset at the same time 2 39 Front Storage Area If your vehicle has a console compartment squeeze the front lever while lifting the top to open it You can store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of the compartment It is located on the floor in the front of your vehicle Assist Handles Use the assist handle above each passenger door when getting out of your vehicle Garment Hooks Your vehicle is equipped with garment hooks They are locate
103. 9 Understanding Radio Reception 3 76 Uniform Tire Quality Grading csecsenc 5 77 United States Customer Assistance 0 7 4 Used Replacement Wheels 0eeeeee ee 5 79 Using Cleaner on Fabric 0 ceseeeeeeeneeeeee eee 5 95 Using Song List Mode n 3 73 Using the Recovery Hooks seeeeeeeeeee eens 4 41 Vehicle COMMON sc orate Sia cee te E E E EES 4 5 Damage Warnings s ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee nena iv Loading arase e S E 4 42 MOVIMDOIS eienaar i ea ENAN iv Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Records ciiis snene monsen unces 7 9 Vehicle Identification Number VIN essere ireslinain aa 5 103 Service Parts Identification Label 5 104 Vehicle Storage revisitar aeeie EEN 5 44 Ventilation Adjustment cc eceeeeeeeeeeee eee ee es 3 21 NISONS eitea e a a E E SA 2 13 Voltmeter Gage sinsdien i ne E aaa EEEN 3 27 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 22 Warnings Hazard Warning Flashers ccecce 3 4 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 5 Safety and Symbols eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees jii Vehicle Damage iicsintnsmiisssastiierisstai sia iv Washing Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eee es 5 98 Weatherstrip Lubrication 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 26 Weight of the Trailer ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 4 53 Weight of the Trailer Tongue
104. B Bracket C Jacking Instructions Roll and place instructions behind the bracket after the tools are installed Bolt Location Wheel Blocks Nut Rubber Band Jack Position rOoOmnmodo 5 93 Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want Of course it s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you can Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again Notice When the compact spare is installed don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They won t fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together Notice Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the c
105. C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department can perform for you Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services In this part are scheduled maintenance services which are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells yo
106. Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the proper range What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 5 37 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir ocation Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on locationt Add washer fluid until the tank is full 5 38 Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage you
107. D 2 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the CD 3 REV Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time of the track 4 FWD Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time of the track 3 49 6 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON will appear on the display RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play Press RDM again to turn off random play RDM OFF will appear on the display lt q SEEK P Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or of the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If you hold either
108. Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 52 Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the
109. ENESS shane hice cost eada E NEAN 4 55 Hood Checking Things Under 0eeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 10 Release moses mis aae e EEA 5 10 OM airea aE A E EE EEE Saa 3 5 How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid 5 22 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank cceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 31 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 5 33 HOW 10 GhECK rieira aoin a aR 5 73 How to Check Lubricant eeeee 5 49 5 51 How to Check Power Steering Fluid 5 37 How to Check the Automatic Transmission Fluid c ccicccesietec serene 5 20 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 19 How to Use This Manual ceceeeeeeeeeeeee neers ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 FYGFOPIANING aa2 s hareanteantetadmmenaessannctaateancmathases 4 29 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine 5 28 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine 5 27 If the Light Is Flashing e eseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 31 If the Light Is On Steady ccceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 3 31 If You Are Caught in a Blizzard eeeeeeeees 4 38 If You Are Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 4 40 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer 4 52 IGhition POSITIONS 22 282620 i a ise tee 2 16 Ignition Transmission Lock Check 0 08ee 6 28 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 30 Inflation Tire P
110. Emission Control Service QO Rotate tires o gt ie in ETT oF page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 63 000 Miles 105 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 66 000 Miles 110 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter o
111. Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada SERVICE ENGINE SOON United States Canada Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required 3 30 Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by y
112. GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or e as required by law In addition once GM collects or receives data GM may e use the data for GM research needs e make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or e share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non GM organizations for research purposes Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or SDM If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar please check the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection 7 10 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area
113. I Automatic dealer Transmission Transmission Fluid Key Lock Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube y GM Part No U S 12346241 in Usage Fluid Lubricant Cylinders Canada 10953474 Engine oil which meets GM i i Standard GM6094M and displays Ta eee eian ae Ne the American Petroleum Institute Chassis 88901242 or lubricant meeting Certified for Gasoline Engines Lubrication requirements of NLGI 2 Category starburst symbol To determine the LB or GC LB i pacing seelEngine Of ee gt Wheel bearing lubricant meeting Front Wheel requirements of NLGI 2 Category Bearings GC or GC LB GM Part No U S 1051344 in Canada 993037 Engine Oil page 5 13 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable c DEX 2 Engine Coolant Pe Engine ERN Front and Rear SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM page 5 23 Axle Standard Part No U S 1052271 in Canada Diff ial 1 49 Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or renia Hi V GMP System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Rear Axle xie ee een Use only att Windshield Locking No U S 1052271 in Canada 1 49 D fricti Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent Differential ae o not add friction 6 32 Usage Fluid Lubricant Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Lever Rear Driveline Center Spline and Universal Joints Constant Velocity Universal Joint DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Fluid Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in
114. PARK P as you maintain brake application and then move the shift lever into the gear you want You must press the shift lever button on the shift lever If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to OFF 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want 5 Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust eg EE i J 3 wrs F I Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can not see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle e Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 29 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked It is better not to park wi
115. Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services explains what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your GM dealer s service department do these jobs Your GM dealer has GM trained and supported service people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If he service information see Service Publcstians Ordering EEIT on page 7 11 Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part
116. Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 81 000 Miles 135 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 84 000 Miles 140 000 km QO Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 fo
117. RITY This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after approximately 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY light goes off If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off Your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for 110 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power 2 14 Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident e If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless e
118. SORY To turn the chime off turn the control counterclockwise or turn the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel down to the fully dimmed position In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF 3 13 Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at reduced brightness when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e the exterior lamp control is in OFF e the sensor detects daytime light e an automatic transmission is not in PARK P and e the parking brake is released When the DRL are on only your headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the headlamps will automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off temporarily while the turn signals are activated 3 14 To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL off put the transmission in PARK P To idle a manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake The DRL will stay off unti
119. Schedule eeee 6 5 Throttle System Inspection c eeeeeeeeee ees 6 31 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 6 6 Transfer Case and Front Axle Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 6 17 Four Wheel Drive Inspection 00 6 31 Part B Owner Checks and Services 6 25 Brake System Inspection 0 eeeeeeeee eee ees 6 31 At Each Fuel Fill w iccetsscitetidewcadeticines can cacieenae 6 25 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 32 At Least Once a Month n se 6 25 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 34 At Least Twice a Year cece ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee es 6 26 Engine Drive Belt Routing eee 6 35 At Least Four Times a Year acc 6 27 Part E Maintenance Record eeeeeeee 6 36 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment
120. See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Inspect engine air cleaner filter See Engine Ain Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 00
121. To be even more certain the vehicle won t The jacking equipment is located behind the rear move you can put blocks at the front and rear seatback on the passenger s side of the vehicle of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 82 gt Wheel Wrench Bracket Jacking Instructions Roll and place tag behind the bracket after the tools are installed Bolt Location Wheel Blocks Wing Nut Rubber Band Jack Position OW If mmo 5 83 3 Insert the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle into the hole in the rear bumper 1 To remove it turn the plastic wing nut F counterclockwise Remove the jack cover 2 Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove the wheel blocks jack and wheel wrench Notice If you remove or restow a tire from to the storage position under the vehicle when it is supported by a jack you could damage the tire and or your vehicle Always remove or restow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground Be sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft 5 84 4 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle 5 When the tire has been completely lowered tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening 6 Pull the tire out f
122. To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND again for two seconds AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local or national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or CD is playing If a cassette tape or CD is playing play will stop during the announcement You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message the information symbol will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the whole message is not displayed parts of the message will appear every three seconds To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button repeatedly A new group of words will appear on the display with each press Once the complete message has been displayed the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button You can view an old message until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to When a message is not
123. Turn Signal Rear Right Turn Signal Rear Right Rear Parking Lamps Trailer Park Lamps Left Headlamp Right Headlamp Front Parking Lamps Instrument Panel Fuse Block Feed Engine Sensors Solenoids MAF CAM PURGE VENT Engine Control Module Fuel Pump Module Oil Pressure Anti Lock Brake System Engine Control Module Injectors Fuel Pump Daytime Running Lamps Fuse A C HORN W W PMP HORN BTSI B U LP IGN B STARTER RAP LD LEV OXYSEN IGN E MIR LKS FOG LP IGN A STUD 2 PARKLP Usage Air Conditioning Horn Not Used Horn Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Back Up Lamps Column Feed Ignition 2 3 4 Starter Retained Accessory Power Not Used Oxygen Sensor Engine Mirrors Door Locks Fog Lamps Starting and Charging Ignition 1 Accessory Feeds Electric Brake Parking Lamps 5 109 Fuse LR PRK LIFTGLASS IGN C HTDSEAT HVAC TRCHMSL RRDFOG TBC CRANK 5 110 Usage Left Rear Parking Lamps Liftglass Starter Solenoid Fuel Pump PRNDL Heated Seat Heating Ventilation Air Cooling System Trailer Center High Mount Stop Light Rear Defogger Truck Body Computer Clutch Switch NSBU Switch Fuse CHMSL HAZLP VECHMSL RR DEFOG HTDMIR ATC STOPLP RR W W Usage Center High Mounted Stoplamp Hazard Lamps Vehicle Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Rear Defogger Heated Mirror Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Stop Lamps Rear Window Wiper Capacities a
124. a immediately Be careful not to spill fuel Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See on page 5 98 When filling the tan do not overfi by squeezing in much more fuel after the pump shuts off When you put the fuel cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 30 Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may_ damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 30 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should
125. abel is attached to the center pillar near the drivers door latch Vehicles without a center pillar will have the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver s door edge This label lists the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight it can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you the size and recommended inflation pressure for the original equipment tires on your vehicle For more information on tires and inflation see on page 5 61 and I nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 72 If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading Information label the Certification Tire label shows the tire size and recommended inflation pressures needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section 4 43 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and
126. abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 5 99 Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield wi
127. adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL will appear on the display and you will hear a beep with the level display in the middle position The bass and the treble will be adjusted to the middle position AUTO TONE Automatic Tone Press this button to select customized equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical To return the bass and treble to the manual mode push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL appears on the display 3 44 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep The balance and the fade will be adjusted to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
128. ag system Improper service can mean that an air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service Notice f you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 11 1 52 For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q If
129. ailer on page 4 51 for more information 2 16 Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition you can turn it to five different positions Notice Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting Do not operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition position for a long period of time A ACCESSORY This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Push in the key and turn it toward you Your steering wheel will remain locked just as it was before you inserted the key Notice Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand Make sure the key is all the way in If it is turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard If none of this works then your vehicle needs service B LOCK This position locks your ignition when the key is removed The steering wheel locks when equipped with a manual tranmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK C OFF This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being towed D RUN This is the position for drivin
130. ain and on Wet Roads cece 4 27 WINLGE rasonar ea teataenmuternacwiee 4 36 Driving Across an INCline ccc eeeeeeeeee eee ee eee 4 22 Driving Downhill ic ccsecheceacd vieckecraiavesgecatnceans 4 21 Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice 0208 4 24 Driving im Water koreino ene 4 24 Driving On Grades ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneee een eeeeeneees 4 59 Driving on Off Road Hills cceeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 4 18 Driving on SNOW or ICE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeees 4 37 Driving Through Deep Standing Water 4 29 Driving Through Flowing Water i c 4 29 Diving Y POI scat acenineietatinnanentindadee suheeenenitins 4 19 Driving with a Trailer ccc eeee cece eee este eee 4 57 Electrical System Add On Equipment eeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 104 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 105 Headlamps s cievsrecacetereet ne a E 5 104 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 105 Windshield Wiper Fuses eeeeeeeeees 5 105 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs ccce 3 32 Engine Air Cleaner Filter a an 5 18 Battery jc cctiestice ese ieee 5 43 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 3 30 Coolant enoret daren ae T Era 5 23 Coolant Heater scci chcssien dieerseiieees glad vaaeidese 2 19 Coolant Temperature Gage eeeeeeeee tenes 3 29 Cooling System Inspection eceeeeeeeeee ee 6 30 Drive Belt Routing 0 c eeeeeee
131. al Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 60 Maintenance When Trailer a Your vehicle will ne rv vice m f n whe n pulling a trailer S3 PAA Scheduled Maintenance Serres on page 6 4 for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SOPVICE E E E eerie EEE denen ieee EE 5 3 Radiator Pressure Cap eecceceececeererererereren 5 26 Doing Your Own Service Work n se 5 3 Engine Overheating 0 ssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 27 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Cooling SyStOM sasinan ennaa 5 29 Vehicle sec ccciesca5 dade cas seebvondaminSalaintlatdetasaeadeeneary 5 4 Engine Fan Noise ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 36 Fuel 5 4 Power Steering Fluid i oa 5 36 a E GUNG i Windshield Washer Eluid 2 5 38 asoline Octane cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenes 5 4 Brakes 5 39 Gasoline Specifications 0 e ee S9 ee ye re ek et epee Battery sanninna a eaa EA 5 43 California Fuel sis
132. al repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials avaliable from your dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small
133. alves clean If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves try a different brand of gasoline Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would no
134. am is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Online Owner Center The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs You can find your specific vehicle information all in one place The Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner s manual United States only e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members United States only Refer to the web for updated information To register your vehicle visit www MyGMLink com United States or My GM Canada withi
135. an it as soon as possible to h and player Sool Care AD a Voile Gisele Tope Playen on page 3 76 If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If you radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 58 CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after disabling the tight loose tape sensing feature on your tape player To disable the feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE CD button The radio will display READY and flash the cassette symbol 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing The override feature will remain active until EJT is pressed Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing The CD symbol will appear on the display If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off first press the EJT button or the DISP knob If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When you turn on the ignition or the radio the CD will start playing if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs with an adap
136. and the brackets are displayed This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio Service Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error This message is displayed when the radio has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle You must return to the dealer for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up You must return to the dealer for service 3 67 XM Radio Messages Radio Display ae A XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language Updating Updating encryption The encryption code in your receiver is being updated and code no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly but you are in a location that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and after 4 second delay text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel CH Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned available Tune to another station If this station
137. appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast 3 54 Finding a Program Type PTY Station To select and find a desired PTY perform the following 1 Press the P TYPE LIST knob to activate program type select mode TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the P TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press the SEEK TYPE button to take you to the PTY s first station 4 lf you want to go to another station within that PTY and the PTY is displayed press the SEEK TYPE button once If the PTY is not displayed press the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then to go to another station 5 Press P TYPE LIST to exit program type select mode If PTY times out and is no longer on the display go back to Step 1 If both PTY and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn alternate frequency on press and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations
138. ar speakers To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will beep once and will adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker controls are displayed The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display Finding a Program Type PTY Station RDS and XM To select and find a desired PTY perform the following 1 Press the P TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the P TYPE knob to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press either SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to the PTY s first station 4 If you want to go to another station within that PTY and the PTY is displayed press either SEEK arrow once If the PTY is not displayed press either SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to another station 5 Press P TYPE to exit program type select mode If PTY times out and is no longer on the display go back to Step 1 If both P TYPE and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements To use the PTY interrupt feature press and hold the P TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt with When selected an asterisk
139. ar wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily Automatic Transmission Operation APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIIRIN Di3 211 DODO Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the steering column There are several different positions for your shift lever It features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK P This means that if your key is in OFF but not locked there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time If you need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery 2 20 It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 26 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailen on page 4 51
140. ard and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle faur veed on do need to be towed out 36e Toing Your Vehicle our Vehicle on page 4 42 Using the Recovery Hooks io re SA i l Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving A CAUTION These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty 4 41 Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if ou need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The t
141. arning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 5 43 Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See uma Senad on page 5 44 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterren Feature Non RDS Radios on page 3 75 or eft Deterrent Feature RDS Radios on page 3 75 5 44 Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
142. ay the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time of the track 4 FWD Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time of the track 6 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON will appear on the display RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play Press RDM again to turn off random play RDM OFF will appear on the display 3 59 lt q SEEK P Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or of the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If you hold either arrow or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD DISP Display Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display To change the default on the display track or elapsed time press the DISP knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep and the selected display will now be the default BAND Press this button to listen t
143. be maintained until the filling is complete e Do not smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the handle located inside the vehicle on the lower left side of the instrument panel 2 Release the secondary latch located under the front edge of the hood 3 Lift the hood 4 Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then pull the hood down firmly to close It will latch when dropped from about 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm without pressing on the hood Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on your engine you ll see F G H Battery See on page 5 43 for more information Coolant Recovery Tank See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 for more information Engine Oil Dipstick See on page 5 13 for more information Engine Oil Fill See on page 5 13 for more in
144. before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged If your transfer case does not shift into 4LO your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4LO button While the 4LO indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4LO but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation 2 24 Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI button You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmi
145. both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 77 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For_information on recommended tire pressure see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 72 and Loading Your Vehiclejon page 4 42 5 63 5 64 eo l SPEC 2012 Ms XPS on O E88 DOT wacko S AS i gt Lot ANN O ek WE oF A zs BF x Z Z gt y c te S958 LT Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and th
146. cal Control Move the reclining front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control toward the front or rear of the vehicle See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 4 for more information Power Lumbar If your vehicle has this feature there will be a control located on the outboard side of the front seat s Press and hold the front of the control until you have the desired lumbar support To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control Heated Seats If your vehicle has this feature the controls are located on the outboard side of the front seats This feature will heat the lower cushion and lower back of the driver s and front passenger s seats Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on low Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater on high Put the switch in the center position to turn the heater off The passenger s safety belt must be engaged for the heated seat feature to work on the passenger s seat Reclining Seatbacks To adjust a manual seatback lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it To return the seat to an upright position pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback If your vehicle is equipped with the vertical power seat control described in on page 1 3 pressing it rearward allows the seatback to recline But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicl
147. casaagenthercioeendacegnssteredeiaan 1 7 Rear Seat Operation cccceeeeeeeeeneeeee eee eenes 1 7 Safety Bells iriiringa ieia 1 8 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 8 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Drivel POSIIOM tiisscndenasecncdane nek s esi 1 14 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 0 1 20 Right Front Passenger Position 000 1 21 Center Passenger Position 0ceeeeeees 1 21 Rear Seat Passengers ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 23 Safety Belt Extender ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 26 Child Restraints 0 ee 1 27 Older Childress sesiis ae 1 27 Infants and Young Children n 1 30 Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 33 Where to Put the Restraint Crew Cab dereiat aaan a 1 36 Top Strap Top Strap Anchor Location 0 seeeee ee Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System Rear Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Air Bag System Where Are the Air Bags cceeeeeeeeeeeeee es When Should an Air Bag Inflate 6 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate 8 How Does an Air Bag Restrain
148. ccurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer XM Radio Messages Radio Display sei gt XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language Updating Updating encryption The encryption code in your receiver is being updated and code no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No Signl Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly but you are ina location that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and after 4 second delay text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel CH Unavl Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned available Tune to another station If this station was one of your presets you may need to choose another station for that preset button No Info Artist Name Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this available channel Your system is working properly No Info Song Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this available channel Your syst
149. ch the display between the radio station frequency and the time Time display is available with the ignition turned off 3 38 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 or AM The display will show your selection TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations lt SEEK Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for two seconds until you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select FM1 FM2 or AM 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numb
150. check to show you it is working SERVICE 4WD The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the four wheel drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction Check Gages Warning Light The CHECK GAGES light will come on briefly when CHECK you are starting the engine GAGES If this light comes and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones Fuel Gage UNLEADED FUEL ONLY United States Canada When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage e At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank e The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up e The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition 3 35 Low Fuel Warning Light This light comes on briefly when you
151. cient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How Does an Air Bag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be
152. city joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km QO Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle flui
153. ct spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Q Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Q If you have not used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore have not changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter O Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Q Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See on page 5 23 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service Q Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for the life of this vehicle See Part B Owner Checks and Ser n page 6 25 Vi ont and Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6 30 6 17 Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or
154. d If you select an equalization setting for your CD it will be activated each time you play a CD The CD will begin to play automatically As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button for two seconds You will hear a beep and the light located to the right of the slot will begin to flash 3 Once the light stops flashing and turns green load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in 4 Once the CD is loaded the light will begin flashing again Press the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button again Once the light turns green load the next CD Repeat this procedure for each CD The CD player takes up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six To load more than one CD but less than six complete Steps 1 through 3 When you have finished loading CDs the radio will begin to play the last CD loaded When a CD is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If more than one CD has been loaded a number for each CD will be displayed If you select an equalization setting for your CD it will be activated each time you play a CD As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display Playing a Specific Loaded CD For every CD loaded a number will appear on the display To play a specific CD first press
155. d acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 33 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1 34 A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Q How do child restraints work A A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraints harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle tog
156. d add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace the filter If vehicle is driven in dusty dirty conditions inspect filter at every engine oil change See Engine Air CleanerFite on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service See footnote t 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first
157. d height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant ina rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 32 The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designe
158. d hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears on the display To display the time with the ignition off press RCL HR or MIN and the time will appear on the display for a few seconds There is an initial two second delay before the clock goes into time set mode Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems RDS Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent minutes Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears on the display AM or PM will appear on the display for morning or evening hours Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute appears on the display The time may be set with the ignition on or off To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System RDS information press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for two seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol appears on the display If the time is not available from the station NO UPDAT will appear on the display RDS time is broadcast once a minute Once you have tuned to an RDS broadcast station it may take a few minutes for your time to update 3 37 AM FM Radio RCL TUNE sex E Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume RCL Recall Press this knob to swit
159. d level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 6 23 Q Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Replace engine air cleaner filter EL cleaner iter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service Q Rotate tires See litesinepiection ena Aata on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 6 24 100 000 Mile
160. d on page 4 42 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 42 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa s to one psi Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant hrar The number of occupants a vehicle is designed multiplied by 150 pounds 68 kg See ocdi Your Vehicle on page 4 42 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the
161. d on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information 4 25 Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively e Do not drink and drive e Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you e Since you can not see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles e Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead e In remote areas watch for animals e If you are tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be What you do in the daytime can also affect your impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision night vision Fo
162. d on the headliner in front of the assist handles 2 40 Luggage Carrier If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood a mattress and so forth the wind can catch it as you drive along This can cause you to lose control What you are carrying could be violently torn off and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision and of course damage your vehicle You may be able to carry something like this inside But never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a luggage carrier it may have side rails and crossrails attached to the roof to secure cargo The adjustable tie downs at both ends of the crossrails should be used to secure loads to the luggage carrier Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment These are available through your dealer You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various sizes Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the crossrail and move them to where you want them Make sure both sides of the crossrails are even then tighten the slider knobs Be sure the cargo is properly loaded Follow these guidelines e Carrying small heavy loads on the roof is not recommended e Secure the load using the tie downs at both ends of the crossrails When loading cargo d
163. dicators that make brake system can damage brake system a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads parts so badly that they will have to be replaced are worn and new pads are needed The sound Do not let someone put in the wrong kind may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle of fluid is moving except when you are pushing on the e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted prake pedal fitmiy surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If ou do wash it off immediately See Care re on page 5 94 The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 5 41 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection on page 6 31 5 42 Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal h
164. e Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs You will get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco E Parts GM Goodwrench E Accessories Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you will want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Sened Publications Ordering Information on page 7 11 Your vehicle may have an air bag system If it does see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 52 before attempting to do your own service work You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Part E Maintenance Record on page 6 36 You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task CAUTION Continued e Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners pa
165. e acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 81 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers p Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
166. e is moving Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable on others Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation The rear seatback can be tilted forward to let you reach the area behind it The rear seatback can be tilted forward to let you reach the area behind it To tilt the seatback forward lift up on the lever located at the base of the seatback on the driver s or passenger s side and then push the seatback forward To return the seatback to the upright position push the seatback rearward until it latches After returning th
167. e seatback to its upright position try to pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted won t provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo belts properly It also tells you some things you should area inside or outside of a vehicle In a not do with safety belts collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a Safety belt properly If you are ina crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same c
168. e a new GM original equipment wheel 5 79 Tire Chains Don t use tire chains There s not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device CAUTION Continued 5 80 only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blowout while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curv
169. e boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle 5 23 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and the proper coolant 5 24 Notice f you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engi
170. e bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly 6 Put the new bulb into the bulb assembly and reinstall it in the headlamp assembly by turning 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up it clockwise until it is tight 3 Unplug the electrical connector 7 Plug in the electrical connector 4 Pull the headlamp lens assembly out 8 Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle 9 Install the two retaining clips 10 Close the hood 5 54 One Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown in One Piece Composite Headlamp System under Headlamps on page 5 53 2 Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly NoD Pull the bulb straigh out to remove it from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and twist it clockwise until it is tight Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips Close the hood 5 55 Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown in Two Piece Composite Headlamp System under Headiamps on page 5 53 2 Locate the locking tabs on the assembly Squeeze the tabs together and push that end of the assembly out while holding the tabs The assembly will swing out 3 Unplug the electrical connector Turn the harness bulb soc
171. e default on the display press the DISP knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep and selected display will now be the default 3 51 Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 or AM The display will show your selection TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations lt q SEEK P Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there The radio will seek only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal lt PSCAN P Preset Scan Press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds The radio will produce one beep The radio will scan through each of the preset stations stored on the pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station SCAN will appear on the display Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets The radio will scan only to the preset stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal 3 52 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM Tune in the desired station Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization Press and hold one of the six numbered p
172. e eeeeeee eee eeaes 3 18 Cleaning Inside of Your Vehicle anseres 5 95 Outside of Your Vehicle ccceeeeeeeeee tenes 5 98 Underbody Maintenance 5 101 WeatherStrips 2 ceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 98 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels eeeeeeeeeees 5 100 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0 00 5 98 Cleaning Fabric Carpet ceceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 95 Cleaning Glass Surfaces 0ceeeeeeeeeee sees 5 97 Cleaning Interior Plastic Components 5 97 Cleaning Leather 0s cciciss ccasacdieeitedeseezecceveeeeass 5 96 Cleaning the Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eee kaas 2 31 Cleaning the Photocells eceeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 31 Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel 5 97 Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 100 Cleaning Tires 2 2 2 ccccccceeceeeenceeee nese ceeneea dene ene 5 100 Cleaning MDY iensen a 5 96 Cleaning Wood Panels 5 97 Climate Control System ceceeeeeee eee eee tenes 3 18 Outlet Adjustment cceeeceeeeeeeeeee tees 3 21 Compact Spare Tire cceceeeeseneeeeeeea een eeaes 5 94 Content Theft Deferrent ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 14 Control of a Vehicle ceceeeeeee eee eee eee eee een eens 4 5 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage Heater Engine niseme aA COOLING Syster syl leiis e EAER Cruise Control sieriiisi ert iea iaei aa Current and Past Mode
173. e following to the Roadside Assistance Representative e Your name home address and home telephone number e Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle e Model year color and license plate number e Mileage Vehicle Identification Number and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we are only a phone call away Chevrolet Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 1 800 234 8872 text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Chevrolet s judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Buick reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to
174. e maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see of page 2 72and D Department of Transportation DOT The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 72 and on page 4 42 5 65 PRY USE Ong y 9 80 eats goa ae bane T x N Compact Spare Tire Example 5 66 so N Ssaud xvw isa 09 3 NLowanns A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a reqular road tire has lost air
175. e road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn To sound the horn press the horn symbol on the steering wheel pad Tilt Wheel A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive If you have the tilt steering wheel you can raise it to the highest level to allow more room for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the steering column under the turn signal lever To tilt hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever toward you Move the wheel to a comfortable level then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you e Turn and Lane Change Signals complete your lane change The lever will return by itself e Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Whien you release it As you signal a
176. e size P245 75R16 109S RLL D E F Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall 5 68 C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z The light truck tire size example above shows dual or single tire configurations LT245 75R16 E120 116S ULT Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The
177. e them yet 2 Turn the jack handle clockwise slightly to raise the jack lift head 3 Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack nie A A 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly clockwise Raise the vehicle far Sar off the positioned San damage the vehicle and even ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal fit underneath the wheel well inj n hicl mage r fit th f injury and vehicle Gamage De Sure to tif the 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 88 6 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off Never use oil or grease on studs or nut
178. e you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Chevrolet please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the progr
179. eady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filing Your Tanklon page 5 7 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off 3 31 Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See on page 5 4 Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the ve
180. ean driving trouble On a wet road you can not stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement 4 27 The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts 4 28 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can not try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally
181. eck constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace the filter If vehicle is driven in dusty dirty conditions inspect filter at every engine oil change See Engine Air CleanerFite o page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An
182. economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash or near crash event by computer systems commonly called event data recorders EDR In a crash or near crash event computer systems such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as engine speed brake applications throttle position vehicle speed seat belt usage airbag readiness airbag performance data and the severity of a collision This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occupants 7 9 To read this information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than e with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee e in response to an official request of police or similar government office e as part of
183. eed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased 3 11 Exterior Lamps O DOME OVERRIDE The control on the driver s side of the instrument panel operates the exterior lamps 3 12 The exterior lamp control has three positions O Off Turn the exterior lamps control all the way counterclockwise to turn off the lamps and put the system in automatic headlamp mode 300 Parking Lamps Turning the exterior lamps control to this position turns on the parking lamps together with the following e Sidemarker Lamps e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights Headlamps Turning the exterior lamps control to this position turns on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition
184. eeeeeeeee neers 6 35 Engine Compartment Overview 6eeee 5 12 Exhaust ccseciststezeu aitre idboenensatauteeaceiesevigiere 2 29 Fan NOISE sacscittscncaccagcencneamannccapernddeazest ates 5 36 a E AEE E AE E 5 13 Overheating secsi irinse uin an ee ani 5 27 MOLAMUING ses caterer cp cere annoia eN a iea eE 2 18 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 08 5 108 Engine Coolant Level Check ncccsser 6 25 Engine Oil Additives ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee teen ees 5 16 Engine Oil Level Check ceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 25 Engine Speed Control 2 2e sete eee 2 19 Entry LIGNING sisiane nenoaia 3 15 Environmental Concerns eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 15 Event Data Records EDR eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 7 9 EXM HONING sinenengan eana iaaa 3 16 Express Down Window o e 2 12 Extender Safety Belt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 26 Exterior LAMPS eaccccttcaitcactwetesunnncnemnieadieenacesne 3 12 Filter Engine Air Cleaner a se 5 18 Finding a Program Type PTY Station 3 54 Finding a Program Type PTY Station RDS and XM ooo eeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee 3 45 3 65 Finding a Station 08 3 38 3 43 3 52 3 62 Finish Care 20 2 0 ccceceeeee eee eeeeeee eee eee een naie 5 99 FINISH Damage crionoriirursns pissasta 5 101 Fixed Mast Antenna eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teeta tees 3 78 Flash to Pass Feature cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees
185. eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 1 41 Leaving Your Vehicle eceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running 2 27 Light Air Bag Readiness ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 3 26 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 06 3 29 Brake System Warning eseeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 28 Charging SyStem ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 3 27 Check Gages Warning eeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 35 Low Fuel Warning vic0 ciscieeeiiesreestivecseorieens 3 36 Malfunction Indicator ceeeeeeeeeeeeenee eens 3 30 Safety Belt Reminder csceeeeeeneeeeenee 3 25 SOCUMLY sioe Secunia vet O AE E RENAN 3 34 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light 3 34 Loading Your Vehicle e ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 42 Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving 4 14 Locking Rear Axle cc scicctsececeentaccbderiapeaaenanieancees 4 8 Lockout ProteCtony neisa onran unane 2 9 Locks DOOL seana e E E E 2 6 Leaving Your Vehicle senrirerrisicrretesiaesna 2 9 Lockout Protection iirrainn anie 2 9 Power DOOM yi sindicad boule sash ee aaia aana aE 2 7 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 7 Rear Door Security LOCKS c eeeeeeeee trees 2 9 Long Trip Highway Definition cee 6 6 Long Trip Highway Intervals ceeeeeeeeee ners 6 6 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 6 17 Loss Of Control cenre asean 4 13 Low Fuel Warn
186. eel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel us
187. eight or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear If you do not have four wheel drive and your brake pedal goes down farther than normal your rear drum brakes may need adjustment Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number ae on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery See Engine Compaen IITE on page 5 12 for battery location W
188. ell as the instrument panel outlets 3 19 MAX A C Maximum Air Conditioning This mode recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly It directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets For quick cool down on hot days do the following 1 Select A C 2 Select the coolest temperature 3 Select the highest fan speed You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again This is normal The system is designed to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while still maintaining the selected temperature The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal 3 20 Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield and side windows Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly For best results clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting amp Defog This mode can be used on cool hum
189. em is working properly 3 47 XM Radio Messages cont d Radio Display Message Condition Action Required No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel Your system is working properly No Info No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this message available time on this channel Your system is working properly Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you the chosen category selected Your system is working properly XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If you receive this message after having your vehicle serviced check with the servicing facility Radio ID Radio ID label If you tune to channel 0 you will see this message channel 0 alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate your service Unknown Radio ID not known If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0 should only be if you may have a receiver fault Consult with your dealer hardware failure Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time your receiver may have a fault Consult with your retail location 3 48 Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pu
190. ems as far forward as you can e Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain does not toss things around e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You will find other important information in this manual See Loading Your Vehiclelon page 4 42 Luggage on page 2 40 and on page 5 61 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns GM recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife
191. en the engine is cold the coolant level should be at least up to the ADD mark If it isn t you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system 5 29 Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle If there seems to be no leak start the engine again The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine 5 30 Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the ADD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolan
192. entification cont d Description Usage Vehicle Identification Number VIN Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes Biodegradable and a ry phosphate free SAMPLE4UX1M072675 Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Spot Lifter Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics vinyl leather and carpet Odor Eliminator See your General Motors parts department for these products See Part D Recommended Fluids ana on page 6 52 5 103 Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is e your VIN e the model designation e paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 5 104 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice
193. er Anti lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips Driving on Curves It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to
194. er for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player For best results use a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tape player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged tape in error To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five seconds READY will appear on the display and a cassette symbol will flash for five seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time After the cleaning cassette is ejected the broken tape detection feature will be active again You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleanin
195. er has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns 4 57 Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signa
196. ered pushbutton the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO To adjust bass and treble press and release AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust bass or treble to the middle position select BAS or TRE Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep B and a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position end out of audio by waiting for the display to change to the time display Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep CEN will appear on the display 3 39 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers press and release AUDIO until BAL appears on the display Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers press and release AUDIO until FAD appears on the display Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust balance or fade to the middle position select BAL or FAD Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
197. ether at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps anda crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system or the LATCH system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint Crew Cab Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We therefore recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position including an infant rid
198. ety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see on page 1 27 infants and Young Childrenjon page 1 30 Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make_sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt on page 1 26 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as
199. f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Q Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Ait Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service 6 22 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote O Inspect engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velo
200. f you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path 4 23 Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels will not get good traction You can not accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you will need longer braking distances It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck When you drive on sand you will sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control 4 24 Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rive
201. fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Brakinghon page 4 6 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can not reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 37 If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe e Turn on your hazard flashers e Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow 4 38 e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothi
202. formation Automatic Transmission Dipstick See on page 5 20 for more Information Power Steering Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid ion on page 5 36 for more informa Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brakes on page 5 39 for more information ngine Air Cleaner Filter See Cleaner Filte on page 5 18 for more information Engine Compartment Fuse Block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 for more information J Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Windshiela Washer Fluid on page 5 38 for more information Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overviewjon page 5 12 for e location of the engine oil dipstick Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD line then you will need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind_of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity AT land Spec
203. formation See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Q Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Ait Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service 6 20 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first
204. fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 5 105 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse b block is located at the end of the instrument panel pea 4 C WA ai Cer on the driver s side of the vehicle a Cr ato esr gr mac 1 ce a HVAC CRUISE WPR RDO 5 STR WHL EA ILLUM I STR WHL IGN RDO IGN ILLUM NOILVWHYOANI X90798 3SN4 Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are provided in the cover To reinstall the fuse panel Fuse Usage cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise A Not Used B Not Used 1 Not Used 2 Cigarette Lighter Data Link Connector Cruise Control Module and Switch Body Control Module Heated Seats 5 106 Fuse 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Usage Gages Body Control Module Instrument Panel Cluster Parking Lamps Power Window Switch Body Control Module Ashtray Lamp Steering Wheel Radio Controls Headlamps Switch Body Control Module Headlamp Relay Courtesy Lamps Battery Run Down Protec
205. g E START This position starts your engine Retained Accessory Power RAP Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work for up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF Your radio power windows sunroof and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Notice Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If it doesn t start within 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while y
206. g List Mode The six CD CD changer has a feature called song list This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections To save tracks into the song list feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one CD See LOAD CD listed previously in this section for more information 2 Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list mode S LIST should not appear in the display If S LIST is present press the SONG LIST button to turn it off 3 Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right arrow button to locate the track that you want to save The track will begin to play 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the track into memory When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of continuously pressing SONG LIST two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has been saved 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections S LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save more than 20 selections 3 73 To play the song list press the SONG LIST button One beep will be heard and S LIST will appear on the display The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order that they were saved You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN arrows Seeking past the last saved track will return you to the first saved track To delete tracks from the song list perform the foll
207. g cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold the EJT button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced Care of Your CDs Handle CDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a CD is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling CDs Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge 3 77 Care of Your CD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent you should replace it Check occasionally to be sure the mast is
208. ger stations To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND again for two seconds AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio Service RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local or national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is muted or a CD is playing If a CD is playing play will stop during the announcement You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations 3 45 INFO Information If the current station has a message the information symbol will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the whole message is not displayed parts of the message will appear every three seconds To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button repeatedly A new group of words will appear on the display with each press Once the complete message has been displayed the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button You can view an old message until a new message is received
209. h the automatic transmission in PARK P or the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating on page 5 27 Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet or into gear for a manual transmission When parking uphill turn your wheels away from the curb When parking downhill turn your wheels into the curb 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 4 59 6 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift into PARK P or REVERSE R for a manual transmission If you have a four wheel drive vehicle with an automatic transfer case be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you e start your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake Let up on the brake ped
210. hains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded then it needs its own brake and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailers brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if e The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure e The trailers brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch all parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trail
211. hains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare 5 94 Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flames if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you are cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle e Gasoline Benzene e Naphtha e Carbon Tetrachloride e Acetone e Paint Thinner e Turpentine e Lacquer Thinner e Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too Do not use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle e Alcohol e Laundry Soap e Bleach e Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning Fabric Carpet Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet They will clean a ane and blue very well You can get GM ap leaning pr from your dealer See Vehicle ET Se Matera on page 5 102 Here are some cleaning tips e Always read the instructions on the cleaner label e Clean up stains
212. he number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load Sce Coadeg Yen Vered on page 4 42 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire_size and recommended inflation pressure See Loading You eniad hicle on page 4 42 5 72 Inflation Tire Pressure The tire and loading information label shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least hree hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 42 for the location of your vehicle s tire and loading information label Notice Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following e Too much flexing e Too much heat e Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following e Unusual wear e Bad handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire If you have a compact spare tire it should be at 60 psi 420 kPa
213. he roof symbol on it until the located between the roof is vented ace 2 Press and hold the side of the switch with the roof symbol on it again to fully open the roof The roof will stop when it is fully opened Releasing the switch at any time will stop the roof at that position 3 To close the sunroof press the side of the switch opposite of the roof symbol and hold it until the glass panel is seated The sunroof switch will only work when the ignition is on or when the ignition is off and retained accessory power is active See Retained Accessory Power under Ignition Positions on page 2 16 for more information 2 42 Manually Closing the Sunroof If you are unable to operate the sunroof using the switch check the fusible link under the dashboard Your vehicle when new came with a tool for manually operating your sunroof See your dealer if you cannot locate this tool in your vehicle To manually close the sunroof do the following F p ee os 2 Insert the key and turn to the right 1 Use a flat bladed tool to remove the cover 2 43 4 NOTES 2 44 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview eee 3 2 Oil Pressure Gage cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 33 Hazard Warning Flashers eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 4 Security Light seiiet aen cee 3 34 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 5 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Ligh
214. help save both batteries And it could save your radio 4 Open the hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminal locations on each vehicle See Engine Compartment Overvie on page 5 12 for more information on location of the battery 5 45 Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the batteries have enough water You do not need to add water to the ACDelco battery or batteries installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 46 Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted meta
215. hicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 3 32 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressu
216. hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There is more discussion of these subjects later e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can not control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and j
217. hometer oreren ee EEEE ES 3 25 Theft Deterrent Feature Safety Belt Reminder Light 0 0cccceeeeeeee 3 25 RDS Radios vente teeteeeeees SEES 3 75 Air Bag Readiness Light 0 0 c cc cceceeeeeeeees 3 26 Understanding Radio Reception ee 3 76 Charging System Light c cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 76 Voltmeter Gage kirsussa r n E 3 27 Care of Your CDS s sssssissererireenereeenenn 3 77 Brake System Warning Light et eed ee eres 3 28 Care of Your CD Player radaran Raa aeDA 3 78 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 29 Fixed Mast Antenna EAS A E E 3 78 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 0 3 29 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System Malfunction Indicator Lamp 0 ccceeeseeeees 3 30 48 Contiguous US States eee 3 78 Instrument Panel Overview 3 2 The main components of your vehicle s instrument panel are the following A B C D E F G Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 21 for more information Instrument Panel Cluster See nstrument Pane on page 3 23 for more information Electronic Transfer Case Switch See Transfer Case under Four Wheel Drive on page 5 50 for more information Lamp Controls See Exterior Lamps on page 3 12 for more information ie Lamp Button See Fog Lamps under Exterior on page 3 12 for more information Brake Relea
218. houlder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint in this seat See Manual Seats on page 1 2 or on page 1 3 2 Put the restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 5 Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 45 1 46 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Air Bag System This part explains the air bag syste
219. i cations on page 5 111 Notice Do not add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged See Engine Compartmen Overview on page 5 12 Tor the location of the engine oil fill cap AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through 5 14 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL HOT AND GM WEATHER STANDARD GM 6094M SAE 10W 30 ACCEPTABLE IF 5W 30 IS NOT SAE SW 20 AVAILABLE RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED e SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However if it is going to be 0 F 18 C or above and SAE 5W 30 is not available you may use SAE 10W 30 These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst KA symbol on the container A ASOLINE This symbol indicates that the
220. ial rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot 4 31 Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharpl
221. id days to keep the windshield and side windows clear P Defrost This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and the side window outlets with only a little air directed to the floor outlets When you select this mode the system runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Outlet Adjustment Operation Tips The flow through outlets on your vehicle allow outside e Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air air to enter your vehicle while it is moving Outside inlets at the base of the windshield that may air will also enter your vehicle while the air conditioning block the flow of air into your vehicle compressor is running e Use of non GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system e Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively Use the thumbwheels located in the center and on the sides to change the direction of the air flowing through the outlets 3 21 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could
222. ight stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the SECURITY message comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at thi also want to check is time You ma the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 See your dealer for service In an emergency call the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 2 15 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts e Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings e Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Tr
223. ignal lever toward you but not so far that you hear a click If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers To operate the windshield wipers turn the band located on the multifunction lever upward or downward MIST Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle Hold it until the windshield wipers start Then let it go The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on MIST longer OFF Turn the band to OFF to turn off the windshield wipers LO Low Speed Turn the band away from you to LO and past the delay settings for steady wiping at low speed HI High Speed Turn the band away from you to HI and past the delay settings for wiping steady at high speed Delayed Wiping You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay lt 9 PUSH Windshield Washer There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed Be sure to clear ice and snow from
224. ill gt e It is much more likely to happen going uphill But if it happens going downhill here is what to do e Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake e Shift to PARK P or to neutral with the manual transmission and while still braking restart the engine e Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down e If the engine will not start get out and get help Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also 4 22 driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit some
225. ineie cancun EE 3 38 Antenna Fixed Mast cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 78 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 78 Anti lock Brake System eceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee een eees 4 7 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 29 Appearance Care 2 e ceeeee seen eeeeeeeeee eee 5 94 Care of Safety Belts eeeeeeeeee eee eeees 5 97 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeeee es 5 101 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 95 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 5 98 Finish DAMAGE ssssachaetscicni acess deaveesecnctesua iene 5 101 Sheet Metal Damage e eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 101 Underbody Maintenance ceeeeeeeeee 5 101 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 102 Weathersilips siccien crise ew tseaes ees 5 98 Approaching a TAN c2sae suites cuesiindas n 4 18 ASIINAYS ecirar ranite a a aata 3 18 Assist Handles orinar ENA 2 40 Audio System s ceeceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eeaeenees 3 36 AM FM Radio svcceesciicseerscdetevessteweers gens cnee ess 3 38 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 76 Care of Your CD Player cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 78 Care of Your CDS wit ccssnacitecsndi aries 3 77 Fixed Mast Antenna 2 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 78 Radio with Cassette and CD 3 51 Radio With CD cccasteadeimotsnaeiaanteadanenhsaccens yes 3 41 Radio with Six Disc CD 0 0 0 0
226. ing The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 49 When Should an Air Bag Inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle on 1 50 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate In an impact of suffi
227. ing brake normally but do not pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti lock Brake System Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning ig will Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Rememb
228. ing in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat Here is why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat CAUTION Continued 1 36 If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat There is a limited space in the rear seating area of a crew cab pickup model If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear outside seating position of a crew cab model be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position because the restraints will not work properly If a forward facing child seat must be secured in the vehicle s right front seat the seat should be moved back as far as possible However it is better to secure the restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an
229. ing Light ceeeeeeeeee eee eeee 3 36 Luggage Cartier vicccctasvizaesssess cued ieee 2 40 Lumbar Power Controls sepenan ea ae 1 3 Maintenance Schedule At Each Fuel Fill 0 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 25 At Least Four Times a Year cecen 6 27 At Least Once a Month n se 6 25 At Least Once a Year aeecceeeeeeeeeeeeenn 6 27 At Least Twice a Year scenerna 6 26 Brake System Inspection ceeeeeeeeee eee 6 31 Engine Cooling System Inspection 6 30 Exhaust System Inspection eseeeeeees 6 30 Fuel System Inspection c eeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 6 30 How This Section is Organized 0eee 6 3 Maintenance Schedule cont INMOGUCHON e e EE E E E S 6 2 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 6 17 Maintenance Requirements asnccccseenrerenn 6 2 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 34 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 6 4 Part B Owner Checks and Services 6 25 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 6 30 Part D Recommended Fluids and EUDRICANIS sce Pe E E bates dusicnnnicale reise antin tan 6 32 Part E Maintenance Record secsec 6 36 Selecting the Right Schedule eeeee 6 5 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 6 6 Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection eeeeeeeeees 6 30 Throttle System Inspection eeeeeeeeeee ees 6 3
230. ing more than one child restraint to a single bracket could cause the anchor to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per bracket When using a top strap equipped child restraint in a rear outboard seating position route the top strap over the top of the seatback Then attach it to the anchor point for that seating position Once you have the top strap anchored you will be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say 1 38 Top Strap Anchor Location The anchor points for the rear seat child restraint positions are located on the back wall behind the rear seat Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right front passenger s position because there is no place to anchor the top strap Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers This system designed to make installation of child restraints easier does not use the vehicle s safety belts for Children LATCH System Instead it uses vehicle anchors A B and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether strap C Your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH System It is available in the second row outboard seating positions and in the front passenger po
231. ing positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT RIM COLD TIRE PRESSURE 4 46 The Certification Tire label is found on the driver s door edge above the door latch The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle If you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads Please note your vehicle s Certification Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle hand
232. inning of the current selection SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display while the cassette player is in the previous mode Pressing this pushbutton multiple times or holding it will increase the number of selections to be searched back up to 9 2 NEXT Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape If you press this pushbutton more than once the player will continue moving forward through the tape SEEK anda positive number will appear on the display 3 REV Reverse Press this pushbutton to reverse quickly within the tape Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape reverses The station frequency and REV will appear on the display You may select stations during reverse operation using TUNE SEEK or PSCAN 4 FWD Forward Press this pushbutton to advance quickly within the tape Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape advances The station frequency and FWD will appear on the display You may select stations during forward operation by using TUNE SEEK or PSCAN 5 Q SIDE Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape lt q SEEK P The right arrow is the same as the NEXT pushbutton and the left arrow is the same as the PREV pushbutton If the arrows are held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving
233. iods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Driving on Grades under Towing a Trailer on page 4 51 If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL and let the engine idle 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 5 28 If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while you re parked Push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface Wh
234. ion time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you are driv
235. irectly on the roof panel use the crossrails to keep the load from shifting e If you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as possible Tie the load to the tie downs provided Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 100 Ibs 45 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 42 To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened Bed Rails If your vehicle has bed rails they are there for appearance only If you try to tie down a load with them or to secure things in your truck not only can it damage the bed rails but the load can loosen This could cause injury to you or others Secure loads by using the cargo tie down loops inside the truck bed area 2 41 Sunroof To operate the sunroof using the power switch do the following If your vehicle has a 1 When vent opening the sunroof press and hold the sunroof the switch is side of the switch with t
236. irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 5 101 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing the following products Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Usas Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior Wax Treated polishing cloth Tar and Road Oil Removes tar road oil and Remover asphalt Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Polish stainless steel White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black Cleaner marks from whitewalls Vinyl Cleaner Glass Cleaner Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner Finish Enhancer Swirl Remover Polish Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans vinyl tops upholstery and convertible tops 5 102 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials contd C Description Usa Removes dirt grime smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on wipe off Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches and protects finish Cleans shines and protects in one easy step no wiping necessary Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Id
237. irror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleratio
238. ission fluid to use See Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill Notice We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON IIl because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty e After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check the Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier o determine what on page 6 32 e When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating sael Engine Overheating on page 5 27 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C e Giv
239. istance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 78 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wh
240. ither the chime nor the light will come on 3 25 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag System on page 1 47 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready e N If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away 3 26 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Charging
241. ition before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle 1 47 The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Ligh on page 3 26 Where Are the Air Bags Anyone who is up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 27 and and Young Children on page 1 30 There is a air bag readiness light on the e instrument panel which A shows the air bag symbol ae o air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 48 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag cover
242. ive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice lf the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change the Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 15 000 miles 25 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions e In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher e In hilly or mountainous terrain e When doing frequent trailer towing e Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km See Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6 4 5 20 How to Check the Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the
243. iving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates
244. k for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 54 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you ve had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts AN CAUTION ATTENTION To help avoid personal injury belt assembly must be replaced if this vehicle is in a crash or if Replace Belt appears below Pour aider viter les blessures la ceinture de s curit doit tre remplac e si le v hicule a t dans une collision ou si les mots Remplacer la ceinture de securit appraissent Replace Remplacer Belt la ceinture If you ever see a label on the driver s or the right front passenger s safety belt that says to replace the belt be sure to do so Then the new belt will be there to help protect
245. ket counterclockwise to remove it Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight To reinstall the assembly snap the outboard end of the lamp assembly back into the vehicle Then swing the assembly in and snap it into place Install the two retaining clips Close the hood Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 3 Remove the bulb 4 Install a new bulb 5 Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws If equipment such as a cap or camper is installed on your vehicle a center high mounted stoplamp feed wire is provided along the driver s side rear frame This 2 Remove the lens wire should be used to install a center high mounted stoplamp in the cap or camper 1 Remove the lens retaining screws 5 57 Taillamps Replacement Bulbs 1 Open the tailgate 2 Remove the screws Halogen Headlamps 9006 HB4 or from the lamp Composite Low Beam 9006 LL assembly near the Composite High Beam 9005 HB3 tailgate latch Tail and Stoplamps 3057 Rear Sidemarker Lamps Front Sidemarker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Center High Mounted Stoplamp For replacement bulbs not listed here please consult your dealer 3 Pull the assembly away from the pickup side panel 4 Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it Push the tab in while you turn the socket
246. l Order Forms Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation 0 sceeeeeeeeeeees Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users cceeeeeeeeeees Customer Assistance Offices cceeee eee Customer Satisfaction Procedure 65 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government eeeee Roadside Assistance Program eeeeee Service Publications Ordering Information Daytime Running Lamps cceeeeeeeeeeee eee Defensive Driving Defogging and Defrosting ceeeeeeeeee eee eee Doing Your Own Service Work eeeeeeeeeeees Dome L mp sensnm 4 Door LOCKS negima tnpa oaea AE EEE 2 6 Power Door LOCkS scscssecesvascacarvieee criveteteeasaes 2 7 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 7 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeee trees 2 9 Driver Position Safety Belt cccceeeeeeeeee eee 1 14 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeee 2 38 Driving At NIG ceset ieee aae Eia 4 26 Gily E E E E T 4 30 DefeNSNE ionerne naa aaea 4 2 DiUMK ON se scicthentncnetet eeences pieesatenearsaueteceesceacceels 4 2 Freeway aaisan ona a a tae 4 31 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 34 In R
247. l engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And don t connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 5 47 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead ba
248. l well in advance 4 58 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have extra wiring and a heavy duty turn signal flasher The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3 when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground wit
249. l you shift out of PARK P or release the parking brake The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada When necessary you may turn off the automatic headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps DRL feature by following the steps below 1 Turn the ignition to RUN 2 Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds After the fourth press of the button a chime will sound informing you that the system is off The system will revert back to the automatic on mode when the ignition is turned to OFF and then to RUN again 3 To return to the automatic mode push the DOME OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds a chime will sound or turn the ignition to OFF and then to RUN again As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Fog Lamps Your vehicle may be equipped with fog lamps Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps or headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel near the lamp control Press the button to turn the fog lamps on Press the button again to turn them off A light will glow in the button when the fog lamps are on Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the
250. le The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering capacity See Weight of the Trailer Tongue next Maximum Trailer GCWR Vehicle Axle Ratio Weight 4WD Crew Cab 3 42 4 3L V6 Auto Trans 5 200 Ibs 2 361 kg 5 200 Ibs 2 361 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 309 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 309 kg If your vehicle is equipped with RPO V4A Xtreme Sport Appearance Package your vehicle was neither intended nor designed to_tow_a trailer For more information on RPO codes see Identification Label on page 5 104 The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 4 5
251. les These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving with You Four Wheel Drive Vehicle on page 4 14 4 47 Payload This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry Be sure to include the weight of the occupants as
252. leteomenmeaaidies 2 31 Leaving Your Vehicle ccccccececeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Manual Rearview Mirror 2 sceeeeeeeeees 2 31 Talgai oaea a E 2 10 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 31 WOW Se cacatesrcccn ieee a omic 2 11 Outside Manual Mirror 0 2 2 31 Manual WindOwWS 0 ccccccecccceeeeeeeeeeneeeees 2 12 Outside Power Mirrors cccceeeeeete eee 2 32 Power WindOWS 0 0 0c sseeeeeeeeeee aiai 2 12 Outside Convex Mirror 1 seein 2 32 Sliding Rear Window 0 cccccccececesesesseeeseees 9 13 Outside Heated Mirrors c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 33 SUM VISOMS isnon erinan E E senna eE E 2 13 Storage Areas cece eee nee ee neta eeneeee es 2 33 Theft Deterrent Systems ccccccceeeeeeeees 2 13 GOVE BOX iperen tE ieS 2 33 Content Theft Deterrent cccccccccccceccccccceecceee 2 14 Overhead Console cccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeenenes 2 33 ETE ee ten eo ee 2 15 Front Storage Area tee eeees 2 40 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 16 poate CN A epee a Men eo sh New Vehicle Break In 0 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 16 Lu at CT 2 40 as a ggage Carrier ivssccvsseverscnsegdeceesersvedaseosertee Ignition POSitiONS secareasnecarnn iaae 2 16 Bed Rails 2 41 Starting Your Engine ccceceeeeeeeeeee eres 77 ts aa a A E Engine Coolant Heater 0 0ccccccccceseceseeseeeeees 2 19 SONMOOR eire E nce eee ees 2 42 2
253. ll it in and the CD should begin playing The CD symbol will appear on the display If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off first press the EJT button or the DISP knob If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When you turn on the ignition or the radio the CD will start playing if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled You may experience an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur try a known good CD Do not add paper labels to CDs they could get caught in the CD player Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the beginning of the current track if it has been playing for more than eight seconds TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward through the C
254. llows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 If a stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 5 96 Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth e Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do this more than once e Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and vinyl cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry e For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner e Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather e Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Cleaning Wood Panels Use a clean clo
255. ly 2 Remove both retaining cables To remove each cable turn it so the end faces the front Then push forward so the larger part of the hole is over the bolt Pull the end over the bolt 2 10 3 With the tailgate halfway down pull the tailgate toward you at the left side and then move the tailgate to the left to release the right side Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate Make sure it is secure Windows Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your manual side door windows Power Windows If you have power windows the controls are located on the armrests on each of the side doors The switches operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP under gnition Positions on page 2 16 The driver s e passengers windows as well door has a switch for Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower a window Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window Express Down Window The drivers window has an express dow
256. m Your vehicle has air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes CAUTION Continued They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear or low speed frontal crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in pos
257. middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL will appear on the display and you will hear a beep with the level display in the middle position Finding a Program Type PTY Station RDS and XM To select and find a desired PTY perform the following 1 Press the P TYPE LIST knob to activate program type select mode TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the P TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press the SEEK TYPE button to take you to the PTY s first station 4 If you want to go to another station within that PTY and the PTY is displayed press the SEEK TYPE button once If the PTY is not displayed press the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then to go to another station 5 Press P TYPE LIST to exit program type select mode If PTY times out and is no longer on the display go back to Step 1 If both PTY and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn alternate frequency on press and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stron
258. n www gmcanada com Canada Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing 1 800 833 CHEV 2438 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Chevrolet the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet s Customer Assistance Center United States Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 1 800 222 1020 1 800 833 2438 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 243 8872 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit
259. n a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in an increasing number of U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emergency a need to take
260. n feature that allows you to lower it without holding the window switch Press the down arrow on the switch marked AUTO located on the driver s door briefly to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow on the switch Window Lockout Four door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows It is located on the driver s door armrest Press LOCK to activate this feature Press NORM and the windows will return to normal operation The driver will still be able to activate all the windows when LOCK is active Sliding Rear Window Sun Visors To block out glare you can pull the visor down You can also swing the visor from side to side Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help If your vehicle has this feature squeeze the latch in the center of the window and slide the glass to open it When you close the window be sure the latch is engaged 2 13 Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content Theft Deterrent alarm system With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off SECU
261. n in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions Lap Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 1 23 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Bel on page 1 26 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part 1 24 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid u
262. n replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter do the following 1 Insert an object like a thin coin in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the coin 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up 3 Align the covers and snap them together 4 Resynchronize the transmitter See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 7 for instructions 5 Check the operation of the transmitter Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle e You can use the keyless entry system if your vehicle has this feature Door Locks e You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside e You can use the power lock switch if equipped to lock or unlock the doors To manually lock or unlock a door from the inside slide the manual lever on your door Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who ge
263. n skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 13 Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Anti Lock Brakes under Braking on page 4 6 Off road driving can be great fun
264. na whee EES ANE 5 105 Windshield Wipers isiiceiitiicicidsicrsosiirinsi dinein 3 8 Winter Driving stiscitessececieereeedeicadive O E RA 4 36 Wiper Blade Check ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 6 26 16 X XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 78 XM Satellite Radio Service 48 Contiguous US States Y Your Vehicle and the Environment
265. nd Specifications Please refer to Part E Maintenance Recoradjon page 6 36 in the index for more information See refrigerant change label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements Application English Metric Air Conditioning Capacity Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Automatic Transmission 4 7L Drain and Refill Cooling System 13 8 quarts 13 1 L Differential Fluid f Rear Axle a ie i i Front Axle 6 pints Engine Oil with Filter 4 5 quarts Fuel Tank 17 5 gallons 67 4 L Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 Nem VIN Code Spark Plug Gap Firing Order 0 060 inches 5 111 4 NOTES 5 112 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 eseeeeeeeneee 6 2 At Least Once a Year ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 27 INMOGUGHON ceski E aS 6 2 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 6 30 Maintenance Requirements sceserereserenrennns 6 2 Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Boot and Seal Inspection 0 eeeeeeeeeee 6 30 How This Section is Organized 0eeeee 6 3 Exhaust System Inspection ceeeeeeee eee 6 30 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 6 4 Fuel System Inspection sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 30 Using Your Maintenance Schedule 6 4 Engine Cooling System Inspection 0 5 6 30 Selecting the Right
266. nd last into the end with two blade claws A Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted 5 Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slots 5 60 A Claw in Notch B Correct Installation C Incorrect Installation Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions 7 about cu tire warranty and Hee to obtain aes 2 ander inrater tres pose the PaE danger see your GM Warranty booklet for details For additional as ee tir es The ee pe information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet y 6 Pian A included with your vehicle s Owner s Manual pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your tires can cau
267. nded at that point would balance the front and rear 4 49 Here is an example of proper truck and camper match A Camper Center of Gravity B Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone The camper s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity zone for your vehicle s cargo load Campers can only be installed in a long box pickup Check your Truck Camper Loading Label on the passenger s door to determine if your vehicle can carry a slide in camper You must weigh any accessories trailer hitches or other equipment you add to your vehicle Then subtract this extra weight from the CWR This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone for your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this 4 50 If your slide in camper and its load weigh less than the CWR the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle camper match He ll also help you determine your CWR Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the truck camper is loaded drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle weight Rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is located on the rear of
268. nder it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body 1 25 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 26 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have a choice a child should sit next to a window so that the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional res
269. ne radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice f you use the proper coolant you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant The coolant recovery tank is located in the engine compartment near the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at ADD or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher 5 25 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank but be careful not to spill it 5 26 You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Occasionally check
270. ne of the doors unlock Press the To enter the program mode do the following lock side of the power door lock switch once and then the unlock side three times 1 Begin with the ignition in OFF Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever all the way toward you No doors lock None of the doors unlock Press the and hold it while you perform the next step lock side of the power door lock switch twice This 2 Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice Then with turns off the automatic lock feature This is the factory the key in OFF release the turn signal multifunction setting lever Once you do this you will hear the lock For more information see your dealer switch lock and unlock 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the previous four programming options and follow the instructions You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN The locks will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the auto lock unlock setting will not be modified The following instructions detail how to program your door locks Choose one of the programming options befo
271. necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you do ot want to use automatic volume select AVOL OFF 3 42 DISP Display Press this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time Time display is available with the ignition turned off For RDS press the DISP knob to change what appears on the display while using RDS The display options are station name RDS station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available For XM 48 contiguous US states if equipped press the DISP knob while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY Channel Number Channel Name To change the default on the display press the DISP knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep and the selected display will now be the default Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 48 contiguous US states if equipped The display will show your selection TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations lt q SEEK PP Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there The radio will seek only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal lt q PSCAN P Preset Scan
272. nel 0 should only be if you may have a receiver fault Consult with your dealer hardware failure Chk XMRevr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time your receiver may have a fault Consult with your retail location 3 69 Playing a CD The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled You may experience an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur try a known good CD Do not add paper labels to CDs they could get caught in the CD player Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 3 70 LOAD CD amp Press the LOAD side of this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player will hold up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button 3 Wait for the light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in When a CD is inserted the CD symbol will be displaye
273. never you play a CD For more information on AUTO EQ see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section K SEEK gt I Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have passed Press the right arrow to go to the next track If you hold an arrow or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD K SCAN gt To scan one CD press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the currently selected CD Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning To scan all loaded CDs press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each CD loaded Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning RCL Recall Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing To change the default on the display track and elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until the display flashes The selected display will now be the default BAND Press this button to play the radio when a CD s is playing The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio Using Son
274. ng make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can not see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it Keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly
275. now cruise at the higher speed e Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to R A Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control e Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button briefly Each time you do this you ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control e Step lightly on the brake pedal e Move the cruise switch to OFF Erasing Sp
276. ntry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash ae to see if the horn works The horn f blo To replace ma wn the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled During normal operation the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to RUN If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the l
277. o adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep The balance and the fade will be adjusted to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL will appear on the display and you will hear a beep with the level display in the middle position 3 53 Radio Data System RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS your radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While you are tuned to an RDS station the station name or the call letters will
278. o heavy it is not possible to hold it CAUTION Continued For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide gt What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used 1 31 For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight an
279. o some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you do not shift down your brakes could get Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from So hot that they would Hen work well You driving in flat or rolling terrain would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 34 Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate acti
280. o the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening TAPE CD Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio A EJT Eject Press this button to eject a CD Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed first 3 60 CD Messages If CHECK CD appears on the display and the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e It is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smooth the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Radio with Six Disc CD Radio Data System RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS your radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
281. oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API You should look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule e Most trips are less than 5 miles 8 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing e Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic e You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
282. on 4 35 Winter Driving 4 36 Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too
283. on may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While you are tuned to an RDS station the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast XM Satellite Radio Service 48 Contiguous US States XM is a continental U S based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channels including music news sports talk and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information including song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 3 41 Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL will appear on the display Each higher setting will allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume automatically increases the volume as
284. onths whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 6 10 Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 33 000 Miles 55 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or
285. or a different station is tuned to When a message is not available from a station NO INFO will appear on the display TRAF Traffic If TRAF appears on the display the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it 3 46 will stop and TRAF will be displayed When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it If no station is found NO TRAF will appear on the display If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF button to turn off the traffic announcements Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the volume is low Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio Service Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealer for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up You must return to the dealer for service If any error o
286. or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 222 1020 or write Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and t
287. ors which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 5 75 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label or Tire and Loading Information label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type
288. ou hold the ignition key in START When the engine starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each try 2 18 When starting your engine in very cold weather below O F or 18 C do this 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds When the engine starts let go of the key 2 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Notice Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Engine Speed Control Your vehicle is equipped with an engine overspeed control that shuts the fuel off when the engine reaches 5 600 rpm Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can hel
289. ou are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can not there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes Soelaim on page 4 6 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 10 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are dr
290. ough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location 1 2 Find your location on the zone map Record your zone number Press and hold both the ON OFF and the US MET buttons The display will go off After five seconds VAR CAL Variance Calibration will appear on the display When it does release both buttons 4 Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display 5 Press ON OFF to enter your zone number Your variance is now set Sunglasses Storage Compartment The overhead console has a sunglasses storage compartment Driver Information Center DIC If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information Center DIC this system displays the outside air temperature compass direction and trip information in the overhead console US MET United States Metric The US MET United States metric button allows you to switch the display between the English and metric system MODE The MODE button can be used to toggle between three modes of operation OFF COMP TEMP and TRIP COMP TEMP Compass Temperaiure The display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3
291. our warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reducing vehicle speed e Avoiding hard accelerations e Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On St
292. owing steps 1 Turn the CD player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired track to be deleted 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted After a track has been deleted the remaining tracks are moved up the list When another track is added to the song list the track will be added to the end of the list 3 74 To delete the entire song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the CD player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than four seconds A beep will be heard followed by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be heard after four seconds S LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating that the song list has been deleted If a CD is ejected and the song list contains saved tracks from that CD those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list To end song list mode press the SONG LIST button One beep will be heard and S LIST will be removed from the display CD Messages CHECK CD If this message appea
293. p You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located in the engine compartment behind the underhood fuse block on the driver s side of the vehicle 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 19 PARK P This position locks your re
294. part of your load If you added any accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory remember to subtract the weight of these things from the payload Your dealer can help you with this Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle Two Tiered Loading By positioning four 2 X 6 wooden planks across the width of the pickup box you can create an upper load platform The planks must be inserted in the pickup box depressions The length of the planks must allow for at least a 3 4 inch 2 cm bearing surface on each end of the plank 4 48 When using this upper load platform be sure the load is securely tied down to prevent it from shifting The load s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over the rear axle Any load that extends beyond the vehicle s taillamp area must be properly marked according to local laws and regulations Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the rear axle Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle Truck Camper Loading Information
295. ped or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY The lamps will also stay on for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the switch near each lamp Dome Lamp The dome lamp will come on when you open either front door You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel located next to the exterior lamps control all the way up to the second notch In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button located below the exterior lamps control to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when either front door is opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button in With the button in the dome lamps will remain off when either front door is opened To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return it to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open either front door This will override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped to unlock the vehicle Battery Rundown Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy vanity reading glove box cargo and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition i
296. play with each press Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button You can view an old message until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to TRAF Traffic If TRAF appears on the display the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station press this button Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements the radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it If no station is found NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not you can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a station that supports traffic announcements If no station is found NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display Your radio will play the traffic announcements if the volume is low Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
297. pment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only 3 17 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Your vehicle may be equipped with an ashtray and cigarette lighter Pull the front ashtray door down to open it Notice If you put papers or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the front ashtray pull the bin upward To use the lighter press it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Climate Controls Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation for your vehicle Operation Mode Knob Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle 7s Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel
298. r e If the vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner Short Trip City Intervals Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or 3 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Filter Replacement Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance are true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for t
299. r brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P 2 27 Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before_you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting into Park on page 2 26 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 28 Shifting Out of Park P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system which locks the shift lever in PARK when the ignition is in the OFF position In addition you have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 20 If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever Push the shift lever all the way into
300. r every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 6 14 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace the filter If vehicle is driven in dusty dirty conditions inspect filter at every engine oil change See Engine Air Cleaner Filten on page 5 18 for more information An Emission Control Service See footnote t
301. r example if you spend the day in bright problems or by fatigue sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible 4 26 You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and are not even aware of it Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can m
302. r proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 87 000 Miles 145 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote t Q Replace engine air cleaner filter Se Engine All on page 5 18 for more information
303. r tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape can be inserted and will begin playing A tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is inserted If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press EJT to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOL AUDIO and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off first press the EJT button or the DISP knob If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for previous to work Press this pushbutton to go to the previous selection on the tape if the current selection has been playing for less than three seconds If pressed when the current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or the beginning of the current selection depending upon the position on the tape If pressed when the current selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds it will go to the beg
304. r washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work at all So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is
305. railer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down slower Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or 12 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Fuel Filter Replacement Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km
306. ransfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1 800 GM DRIVE 1 800 463 7483 Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed p
307. rash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too 1 8 Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belti Reminder Lightfon page 3 25 In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces Tha
308. re entering the programming mode Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers The security lock lever is located on the inside edge of each rear door Ce g To use the security locks do the following 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 Slide the lever up to the lock symbol to engage the lock 3 Close the door 4 Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside To return the rear doors to normal use disengage the locks by sliding the lever to the unlock symbol Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is Open If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door Tailgate You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle while pulling the tailgate down When you put the tailgate back up be sure it latches securely Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate 1 Raise the tailgate slight
309. re if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it Litho in U S A Part No C2408 A First Edition Canadian Owners You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your dealer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 How to Use This Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you will find that pictures and words work together to explain things Index A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where you will find it copyright General Motors Corporation 06 12 03 All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t
310. re in kPa kilopascals Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure 3 33 Security Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts SECURITY If the light flashes the Passlock system has ertered q tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock on page 2 15 If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 14 for additional information regarding the SECURITY light 3 34 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light If you have this light it should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a
311. ren orrea EaR 3 49 3 58 3 70 Owners Canadian ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees ii Playing a Specific Loaded CD ceeeeeeeeee 3 71 Owner s Information ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 7 12 Playing the Radio 3 38 3 42 3 51 3 62 Power Accessory Outlets scisso nriran 3 17 P DOOL LOCKS sirana ena inea e EE 2 7 Electrical System sesicsnesearrrnininiinseisiaa 5 105 Park P Shifting INO ececeseeesssesseseeseseeseteeseeeseeeeee 2 26 Se ee bi a ee cere ee eereeeee sae eee Steering FUG ee ce cece cece eeceseeceseeeeeeeee 5 36 aming Wind 2 12 Brake nerea acean cee taet dea ince 2 25 MOONS pot etera eras eee sea mee ee Over Things That Burn sees 2 29 hs ata anere ee eee T Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission rogrammable Automatic Door Locks Park P Mechanism Check o n 6 29 Parking om Hills cecepsennrseen naana 4 59 Q Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 6 4 Part B Owner Checks and Services 6 25 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 12 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 6 30 10 Radiator Pressure Cap cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 26 Radio Data System RDS 3 41 3 54 3 61 Radio Messages n 3 40 3 46 3 56 3 67 Radios ennea a aaea a ERE 3 36 AM FM Radio 2 2 0ceceeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 38 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 76 Care of Your CD Player
312. rench to tighten the cable See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on_the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Part A Scheduled on page 6 4 for scheduled rotation intervals 5 74 When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire that does not match your vehicle s road tires and wheels in size and type do not include the spare in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label or the Tire and Loading Information label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 111 Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicat
313. ressure 2 0 0 eee ee eee eee teens 5 72 Inspection Brake System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee tented 6 31 Engine Cooling System cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 30 Exhaust Systemi cassie science ances ge cateagahacctidageesesinn 6 30 UCL System aier ienei e iaa 6 30 Part C Periodic Maintenance 00 6 30 Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal srera trci a aeee 6 30 Throttle SySteM seie cciirinieriiiinisnranetiess atens 6 31 Transfer Case and Front Axle Four Wheel Drive cirscprsenassrieiie sas 6 31 Installing a Garage Door Opener ssececscsececee 2 34 Instrument Panel CNUSIOR sten a 3 23 Overview ic cicdecias errno ei eante ae anan aE 3 2 Instrument Panel Brightness ccccccccecee 3 15 Instrument Panel Fuse Block occccccccccccec 5 106 Interior LaMpS visecccseieesesiesdeetanvdiniaentensesteteds 3 15 JUMP Staring cscgecstcstceteccteaviceasnencneaeieesect acess 5 44 Key Lock Cylinders Service cceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 27 Keyless Entry System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee een eee ees 2 3 KEYS isna a A E E aE 2 2 Lamps EXUGHOP veisin Praesens en a eaii 3 12 IMETO sseeiicenacctasavcues upeaa iaa 3 15 Lamps On Reminder ericeira 3 13 rap Belt ores r E 1 22 Lap Shoulder Belt c cccceeeeeeneeeeeaeeaeeneees 1 14 LATCH System Child Restraints cccceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeees 1 39 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System cc
314. rices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Accessory Power Outlets eceeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped VeMICle css cctesdavteseneks cane i a ndean 1 53 Adding Washer Fluid seceeeeeeeeee eee ee eters 5 38 Additional Program Information 00e 7 9 Additives FUG wciisictnctverepisstentiecesvecaterreasssacawes 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment 0eeeeee 5 104 Add On Equipment scceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 48 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade 0 3 40 3 44 3 53 3 64 After Off Road Driving eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee trees 4 25 Air Bag Readiness Light ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 26 Air Bag System ccccescccitinskl siete vesiaese ladies isles 1 47 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle eee 1 53 How Does an Air Bag Restrain 0 1 50 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle 1 52 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate 0 1 50 What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates 1 51 When Should an Air Bag Inflate 0 1 50 Where Are the Air Bags ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 48 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cceceeeeeeeeeeees 5 18 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM 7 9 A eaen ea Santee dacusctaciane EA 3 76 AM PM Radio 2i i 8 icecccinthetaranoif
315. roblems 0 0 5 96 Specifications Capacities ccceeeeeeee ees 5 111 SPCCdOMOEl sisi ccusegincsshuedihwenieddeeedelissova hive 3 25 Stalling on an Incline ccc eeeeee eee eeeeee eens 4 23 Starter Switch Check cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 6 27 Starting Your Engine cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 Steeg secese ea Tac catsenest E EEE aA 4 9 Steering in Emergencies ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 10 Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection eeee 6 30 Steenng TOS sarirani EE aunts 4 9 Storage Garment HOOKS 4 2ie sssccsecseieees etindeniss eiai 2 40 Storage Areas Front Storage Area 0 00 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 2 40 GIOVE BOX sivicncsesecee ys eersees Spoor TN 2 33 Luggage Carrier cceeeeeeeeeeeneee eee eee tented 2 40 Overhead Console ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 33 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 91 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 0065 4 40 SUM VISOMS scicsivckedeacacs cheered a TEE AEREE r aE 2 13 Sunglasses Storage Compartment 055 2 37 SUNOO cenere arei eee E wid chen EEE 2 42 Tachometer ec erdinoreniediiii nena oniani 3 25 WANGAIG erraren eara a E aE 2 10 Tailgate Lubrication Service 0ceeceeeeee es 6 27 Talla PS ecrini seis cnscghescates bdni ienie 5 58 Temperature and Compass Display 00 2 36 Te
316. rom under the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire itis stowed underneath the rear of your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 94 Notice If you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 7 Put the spare tire near the flat tire The tools you ll be using include the jack A and wheel wrench B Your vehicle may also have an optional hub cap removal tool 5 85 Removing Wheel Covers If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each nut they must be removed in order to get to the wheel Position the bent end of your hub cap removal tool nuts Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to shown or the chisel end of your wheel wrench in the remove the wheel nut caps notch of the hub cap and pry off the hub cap Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel Remove these wheel nut caps before you take off wheel nuts molded into them The wheel wrench won t the hub cap fit these imitation nuts so don t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench 5 86 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire A Front Frame Hole B Rear Frame Hole ZR2 C Spring Hanger Hole Standard Pickups 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts Don t remov
317. rs can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe do not try it you probably will not get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roadsjon page 4 27 for more information on driving through water After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collecte
318. rs on the radio display it could be for one of the following reasons e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Theft Deterrent Feature Non RDS Radios THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOC will appear on the display With THEFTLOCK activated your radio will not operate if stolen Theft Deterrent Feature RDS Radios THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display When the radio and vehicle are turned off the
319. rtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it s not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact you dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Records Your vehicle like other modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel
320. rts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Numbe on page 5 103 Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you might damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel is necessary If you are using 87 octane or higher octane fuel and hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and contained in the World Wide Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www autoalliance org Gasoline meeting these specifications could
321. s 166 000 km Q Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Q Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Q If you have not used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore have not changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Q Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Q Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first see engie Coolando page 5 23 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service Q Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See on page 5 13 for further details
322. s If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 7 Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface 8 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the cone shaped end is toward the wheel Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub If a nut can t be turned by hand use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible 5 89 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications in the Index for wheel nut torque specification 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 10 Use the wrench to Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead tighten the wheel nuts to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid firmly in a crisscross expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel sequence as shown nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications in the index for the wheel nut torque specification 5 90 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other eq
323. s for each pushbutton 3 63 Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push the AUDIO knob until BASS MID or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or to decrease If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position select BASS MID or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to zero To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press this button to select customized bass midrange and treble equalization settings designed for country jazz talk pop rock and classical To return to the manual mode CUSTOM press the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob 3 64 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the re
324. s off This will keep your battery from running down If the battery rundown protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do one of the following to return it to normal operation e Shut off all lamps and close all doors or e turn the ignition key to RUN Accessory Power Outlets Your vehicle may be equipped with an accessory power outlet With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio There may be an accessory power outlet located near the center of the vehicle on the lower part of the instrument panel A small cap must be pulled down to access an accessory power outlet When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap Notice Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equi
325. s setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations ALO Four Wheel Drive Low You may never need 4LO This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction It sends the maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you were driving off road in sand mud or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle in for service An indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed Shifting from 2HI to 4HI Press and release the 4HI button This can be done at any speed and the front axle will lock automatically Shifting from 4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HI button This can be done at any speed and the front axle will unlock automatically 2 23 Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO button You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated
326. s too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the instructions in this section and check with your dealer for more information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Your vehicle may be able to tow a trailer To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section 4 51 If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling accelleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points e There are many different la
327. scsnscstensasdrsceiersios ieee 3 30 Four Wheel Drive Warning Light 3 34 Publications Ordering Information 7 11 Service Bulletins cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 12 Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada 3 30 Service Manuals ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 11 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle 1 52 Setting Preset PTYs RDS Only e 3 66 Setting Preset Stations 3 39 3 43 3 52 3 63 Setting the Time Radios with Radio Data Systems RDS 3 37 Radios without Radio Data Systems RDS serres ds secde ne eserinessterent daaees 3 37 Setting the Time cont Setting the Tone Bass Treble 0 3 39 3 44 3 53 3 64 Sheet Metal Damage eseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee es 5 101 Shifting Into Park P cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 26 Shifting Out of Park P ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee reas 2 28 Short Trip City Definition cc eeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 5 Short Trip City Intervals cceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeee ees 6 5 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 6 6 SKIING sora nense Gancthet Gen ehe sean NEES 4 13 Sliding Rear Windows eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 13 Some Other Rainy Weather Tips 0 4 29 Spare Tire CheCK cccsicctsursaalisvesscea raed aya ney 6 26 Special Fabric Cleaning P
328. se overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index CAUTION Continued 5 61 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical P Metric and a LT Metric tire sidewall PC SPEC 7158 mo Ngoa 5l75R16 o 66 DOT MALS 4a ow L Oy soy b oF NOltovys ogge wo P Metric Tire 5 62 A Tire Size Code The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size Code illustration later in this section for more detail B Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C Department of Transportation DOT The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto
329. se See Parking Brake on page 2 25 for more information Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turr Signal Multifunction Leve on page 3 6 for more information H l J K L Horn See on page 3 5 for more information Ashtray See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on page 3 18 for more information Climate Controls See Climate Control System on page 3 18 for more information Accessory Power Outlets See information Outlets on page 3 17 for more Heated Outside Rearview Mirror Button If Equipped See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2 33 for more information Audio System See Audio System s on page 3 36 for more information Glove Box See on page 2 33 for more information Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on the top of the steering column Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work The flashers will stop if you step on the brake Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of th
330. se undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry System Operaon on page 2 4 e If you are still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry System Operation If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle UNLOCK Press UNLOCK to unlock
331. serasiis epaian nii 5 5 J z 5 44 Additives o s eerren 5 6 UMP SANG arser i annan eiet aaia i Fuels in Foreign Countes aar a a a te 5 6 Rear Axle c cccccccc cece cee ee ee eee eens eens eeneeenes 5 49 Filling Your Tank senises morasse 5 7 Four Wheel Drive ccccccssccccceceesseseaes 5 50 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 2 212 5 9 Front AXle ssiineeiiiiieeiiieieeeeiieeeerireeeeee 5 51 Checking Things Under Bulb Replacement 0 cccccccsceesseeeeeees 5 52 The HOO isinir eea iata 5 10 Halogen Bulbs cresie anene eaea 5 52 HOO Release reiini oiia 5 10 Headlamps sirro iiaa eaei 5 53 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 One Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 55 Engine Oil sepised Hi sencnad amin ia nE OnE 5 13 Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 56 Engine Air Cleaner Filter o c 5 18 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 5 57 Automatic Transmission Fluid 00 5 20 TalllaMpS scsceses arna n a E 5 58 Engine Cola mt ccccstiicscecsssdioigessaameaeieaaiacwces 5 23 Replacement BUDS 0002 cccccctscsensecieseeetesentn 5 58 5 1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 59 Tiesi e na a A NE 5 61 Inflation Tire Pressure ssena 5 72 Tire Inspection and Rotation eee 5 74 When It Is Time for New Tires nsan 5 75 Buying New Tires seroren e ee 5 76 Uniform Tire Quali
332. siestcscacedatemcleesansadasbesneanensac 5 80 Charging System Light cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 27 Check Engine Light sestren ie 3 30 Gages Warning Light eceeeeeeee eee eee ee 3 35 Checking Brake Fluid cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 40 Checking Coolant ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 25 Checking Engine Oil eeeeeeeeeeeee teeter eens 5 13 Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid tevel sik siachsjetag aa E 5 21 Checking Things Under the Hood 00 5 10 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 54 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 101 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeee trees 1 33 Infants and Young Children s 1 30 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System eeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 39 Older Children s s sanieren riaa 1 27 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System verriro aeann 1 41 Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat ROSIUOI saena a E 1 43 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position 0e 1 41 Child Restraints cont Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 0 1 44 TOD Stap side 2ctetsgacdsececuaeaar beceunactaieaseaceecas 1 37 Top Strap Anchor Location ee 1 38 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 36 Cigarette Lighter ccceeeeeeee teens
333. sition In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint designed for that system To assist you in locating the anchors for this child restraint system place your hand in a palm up position and reach up between the seat cushion and the seatback 1 40 If a LATCH type child restraint isn t attached to its anchorage points the restraint won t be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint See Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position in the Index for information on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System Rear 1 Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position you want to use where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 If the child restraint is forward facing attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage The child re
334. ssion The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting your vehicle 2 21 DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re e Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power DRIVE D should not be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving Select THIRD 3 when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D You should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off road driving SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on You can also use SECOND 2 for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 2 22 FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while
335. ssion is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged If your transfer case does not shift into 4HI your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4HI button While the 4HI indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4HI but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation Parking Brake The parking brake is located near the bottom of the instrument panel on the driver s side of the vehicle To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully It is located on the bottom off the instrument panel on the driver s side of the vehicle BRAKE RELEASE If you_are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill see Towing a Trailerjon page 4 51 That section shows what fo do first to keep the trailer from moving 2
336. start your engine LOW FUEL This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn if off add fuel to the fuel tank See Filling You on page 5 7 3 36 Audio System s Notice Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and to give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP you can play your audio system even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP under on page 2 16 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems RDS Press an
337. stem warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light E If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 28 The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is too hot It means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 27 for more information 3 29 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service
338. sting the Alani ssc scccstcasenuncenuncieamateactceacerste 2 15 Theft Deterrent Radio ccceeeeeeee tees eeeees 3 75 Theft Deterrent Systems cceceeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 2 13 Content Theft Deterrent cceeeeeeee eee eeeee 2 14 Pasolo cng h ht esrec haces hua tegeibadiestnne ioe deste 2 15 Throttle System Inspection cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 31 TUT WIRES dieien a AAO E EE 3 5 13 Time Delay ies desoarsesaileiegntaciadsacadsaitseadinesa pracaee 2 31 Tire Inflation Check 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eee ees 6 25 Tire Sidewall Labeling c seeeseeeeeeeaeeee es 5 62 TIe SIZE marara o Macuan eto tcacmecte fen nets 5 68 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 70 TES sacs casectene a sparamiean asec neneans 5 61 Buying New TIES 0 ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 76 CAINS cassetes asee Enar AS E EEE 5 80 Changing a Flat Tire weier serari inise 5 82 Compact Spare Tire cceeseseeeeeneeeeeeeees 5 94 If a Tire Goes Flat wi d cssiciensead aerate 5 81 Inflation Tire Pressure ccenn 5 72 Inspection and Rotation cece eee es 5 74 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeee 5 77 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 78 Wheel Replacement sceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 5 78 When It Is Time for New Tires ncc 5 75 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 6 2 19 TOD Shel be ears acunesscancantonuenes E 1
339. straint instructions will show you how Also see Top Strap on page 1 37 5 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint simply unhook the top tether from the top tether anchorage and then disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH anchorages Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position If your child re tis equipped with the LATCH em E aT horages PPr Top Tethers fon Children LAT l ystem on page 1 39 See on page 1 37 if the child restraint has one If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 41 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 42 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re
340. t 3 34 FROM fectctse sw cntgnis ites eai aa a PEASE 3 5 Check Gages Warning Light eeeee 3 35 THE WGN socrts atecuscns a a eines 3 5 Fuel Gage cstesisccnvrestsetsaichelath irid EEEa 3 35 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceeee 3 6 Low Fuel Warning Light ceeeeeeeee eee 3 36 Exterior LAMPS ssseeeeeee reteset tenets 3 12 Audio System s ccecceseeseseseteeeetenees 3 36 Interior LAMPS issie aain nonini 3 15 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Accessory Power Outlets esceeeeeeee 3 17 Data Systems RDS 0 cccecceseeeeeseeeeeee 3 37 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter 0 3 18 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Climate Controls cccceceeeeeee eee eee eee eeee ees 3 18 Data Systems RDS o ae 3 37 Climate Control System cceceeeeeeeeee eee eee es 3 18 AM EM IRadl0tysie ccenivesiisesehacisseeva Gendarheaeteerie 3 38 Outlet Adjustment ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eenes 3 21 Radio With CD iicn iennige utie munanan 3 41 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 22 Radio with Cassette and CD cece 3 51 Instrument Panel Cluster ccccccccceeeeee sees 3 23 Radio with Six Disc CD ceeteeeteeteiees 3 61 Speedometer and Odometer ccceseeeeeeees 3 25 Theft Deterrent Feature Trip Odometer oi neren na e EAA 3 25 Non RDS Radios 1 eeeeeeeieeeee 3 75 Tac
341. t Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Starter Switch Check 1 2 When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 25 if necessary Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts Try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service 6 27 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brakel on page 2 25 if necessary Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 6 28 3 With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service
342. t be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling Your Tank Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver s side of your vehicle While refueling hang the cap by the tether from the hook on the fuel filler door To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the are
343. t at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 for more information A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the ADD mark start your vehicle 5 31 If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never
344. t into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle You will see a colored area on the lever when the whenever you leave it door is unlocked Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening Power Door Locks If your vehicle has power door locks the switch is located on the armrest Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the doors at once To unlock the doors press the raised area next to the key symbol Programmable Automatic Door Locks If your vehicle has power door locks they are programmable Your vehicle will be programmed to have all the doors lock automatically when the shift lever is moved out of PARK P All the doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back into PARK P The following is a list of the available programming options and how to set them after entering the program mode All doors lock Only the driver s door unlocks Press the lock side of the power door lock switch once and then the unlock side once If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry you may not be able to utilize this option All doors lock All doors unlock Press the lock side of the power door lock switch once and then the unlock side twice All doors lock No
345. t least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 TT Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary 6 30 Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 29 Fuel System Inspection Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation
346. t to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one 1 28 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 29 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone unless there is no other choice Instead they need to use a child restraint 1 30 People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become s
347. ter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled You may experience an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur try a known good CD Do not add paper labels to CDs they could get caught in the CD player Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the beginning of the current track if it has been playing for more than eight seconds TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward through the CD 2 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the CD 3 REV Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to pl
348. tern and additional information See footnote 57 000 Miles 95 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Q Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote t QO Replace engine air cleaner filter See Ename Ail ieanerFiter on page 5 18 for more information An
349. th a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn 5 100 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet met
350. th moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a ee dealin beg cleaner will remove normal moke film interior glass See ims on Vehicle ET ee Materials on page 5 102 Notice f you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger and the integrated radio antenna When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 5 97 Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp wea her more frequen application may be required See Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricant on page 6 32 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water
351. th the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into our vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaustion page 2 29 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See on page 4 36 2 30 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 26 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailen on page 4 51 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you after dark Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation Automatic Dimming
352. the CD AUX button then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing and the track number will appear If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section LOAD cD amp Eject Press the CD eject side of this button to eject a CD You will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a CD is being ejected REMOVE CD will be displayed You can now remove the CD If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds the CD will be automatically pulled back into the receiver If you try to push the CD back into the receiver before the 25 second time period is complete the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the CD several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD after you have tried to push it in manually The receivers 25 second eject timer will reset at each press of eject which will cause the receiver to not eject the CD until the 25 second time period has elapsed 3 71 Once the player stops and the CD is ejected remove the CD After removing the CD push the PWR knob off and then on again or wait for the system to reset This will clear the CD sensing feature and enable CDs to be loaded into the player again lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release the bu
353. the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes 4 2 proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle e Judgment e Muscular Coordination e Vision e Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
354. the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until y
355. thing that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead Q What if am driving across an incline that is not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path I
356. tion Heating Ventilation Air Cooling Control Head Manual Turn Signal Cluster Engine Control Module Interior Lights Auxiliary Power Power Locks Motor 4WD Switch Engine Controls VCM PCM Transmission Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Fuse 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Usage Front Wiper Steering Wheel Radio Controls Radio Battery Amplifier Heating Ventilation Air Cooling Manual Heating Ventilation Air Cooling Automatic Heating Ventilation Air Cooling Sensors Automatic Anti Lock Brakes Rear Wiper Radio Ignition 5 107 Engine Compartment Fuse Block The engine compartment fuse block is located_under the hood on th ide of the vehicle See Engine driver Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more Information on location Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise 5 108 INT ABS BAT FUSE PULLER B Cf a llO A SPARE FUSES sven Frue Jase er or L iome E Fuse TRL TRN TRR TRN TRL B U VEH B U HDLP PWR RT TURN Usage Trailer Left Turn Trailer Right Turn Trailer Back Up Lamps Vehicle Back Up Lamps Headlamp Power Right Turn Signal Front Fuse LT TURN HDLP W W LT TRN RT TRN RR PRK TRL PRK LTHDLP RTHDLP FRPRK INT BAT ENG ECM B ABS ECM F PUMP DRL Usage Left Turn Signal Front Not Used Left
357. tions that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal K SCAN gt I Press and hold either SCAN arrow for Setting Preset Stations two seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 48 contiguous US states if equipped by performing To scan preset stations press and hold either SCAN the following steps arrow for more than four seconds PRESET SCAN will 1 Turn the radio on appear on the display You will hear a double beep The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to or XM2 the next preset station Press either SCAN arrow again 3 Tune in the desired station to stop scanning presets 4 Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization The radio will scan only to stations that are in the 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered selected band and only to those with a strong signal pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will be automatically stored for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the step
358. to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 32 5 50 Four Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles However there are two additonal systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Part C Periodi Maintenance Inspections on page 6 30 How to Check Lubricant To get and accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level service If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Remove the plug and add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 32 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6 4 How to Check Lubricant 5 51 To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant
359. toplamp CHMSL 5 57 Halogen Bulbs jiisssncescsasnececies ernst eantnateaannes 5 52 eadlamps 2icicianinskacesclaieee th cieer E 5 53 One Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 55 Replacement Bulbs s eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 58 TAMllaIMpPS 7 setsvavstetuncendatitaghelens NE 5 58 Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 56 Buying New TIES scat ss ce tecececzlalszesieieneveeasiecens 5 76 California Fuel cccccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeneenenes 5 5 Canada Customer Assistance 0 00eee 7 4 Canadian Owners cccc cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees ii Canadian Roadside Assistance s 0eeeee 7 7 Capacities and Specifications 85 5 111 Carbon Monoxide 058 2 10 2 29 4 36 4 51 Care of Safety BIS 2c sees acciecccudesttiean seks ueaane eeaneede ben 5 97 Your Cassette Tape Player eeeeeeeeee ee 3 76 Your GD Player s22i siic0 steca ineeenveeer cet 3 78 YOUR CDS aroni e a e arae 3 77 Cassette Tape Messages cceeeneeeeeeeeeeenes 3 58 Cassette Tape Player Service 0c eeeeee 6 25 CD Adapter Kits scssicxovescsccsseadiestet ievangsaetaeances 3 58 CD Messages n se 3 50 3 60 3 75 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 5 57 Center Passenger Position Safety Belts 1 21 Certification Tire Label eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 46 Chains TES scccccce
360. traint a shoulder belt can provide gt What is the proper way to wear safety belts gt O If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in a rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 1 27 Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might wan
361. tributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer tow vehicle If you use a step bumper hitch your bumper could be damaged by sharp turns Make sure you have ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper 4 56 If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving You should always use a sway control if your traile will weigh more than these limits You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer For trailers up to 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg you may attach the safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper For heavier trailers follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety c
362. ts why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If m a good driver and I never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Saf
363. ttery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice If the jumper cables are removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 5 48 A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regulary check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem have it inspected and repaired Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6 4 How to Check Lubricant 5 49 To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant
364. tton to play the passage The display will show the elapsed time of the track FWD gt Forward Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release the button to play the passage The display will show the elapsed time of the track RPT Repeat With repeat you can repeat one track or an entire CD To use repeat do the following e To repeat the track you are listening to press and release the RPT button RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn off repeat play e To repeat the CD you are listening to press and hold the RPT button for two seconds RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn off repeat play 3 72 RDM Random With random you can listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order on one CD or on all of the CDs To use random do one of the following e To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in random order press and release the RDM button RANDOM ONE will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play e To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in random order press and hold RDM for more than two seconds You will hear a beep and RANDOM ALL will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press AUTO EQ to select the desired equalization setting while playing a CD The equalization will be automatically set whe
365. ty Grading ceeeeeeeeeees 5 77 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 78 Wheel Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 5 78 Tire CHAINS cess naa aE a aa 5 80 If a Tire Goes Flat cee eeeeeee cece eee 5 81 Changing a Flat Tire ssirssreicissscotirim tennene 5 82 Compact Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 94 Appearance Care l a eeen 5 94 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 95 Care of Safety Belts cc eceeeeeeee eee eeee eens 5 97 Weatherstrips sida c2sieseenolanaceitievi seer a 5 98 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 5 98 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 101 Finish Damage stersscszciieestaciecsnescitsvestart leans 5 101 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeee ees 5 101 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeee eee 5 101 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 102 Vehicle Identification eee 5 103 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 103 Service Parts Identification Label 5 104 Electrical System ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeees 5 104 Add On Electrical Equipment 0 eeee 5 104 Headlamps saiisine aiena 5 104 Windshield Wiper Fuses ssec 5 105 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 105 Fuses and Circuit Breakers n 5 105 Capacities and Specifications 5 111 Servic
366. type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While you are tuned to an RDS station the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast XM Satellite Radio Service 48 Contiguous US States XM is a continental U S based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channels including music news sports talk and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information including song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 3 61 Playing the Radio PWR Power Push this knob to turn the system on and off VOLUME Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume Your system has a feature called automatic volume With this feature
367. u the maintenance services you should have done and when to schedule them When you go to your dealer for your service needs you will know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits_on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 42 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner ee Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive on page 4 14 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 4 Selecting the Right Schedule First you will need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle Here is how to decide which schedule to follow Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle e Most trips are less than 5 miles 8 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing e Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic e You frequently tow a traile
368. udgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive_or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving on page 4 2 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can not do There are some hills that simply can not be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can not control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top 4 18 On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill e Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places
369. uipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist However storing it that way for an extended period could damage the wheel To avoid this have the wheel repaired as soon as possible Follow this diagram to store the underbody mounted spare A B C D E Wheel Wrench Hoist Assembly Retainer Spring Tire F Valve Stem Pointed Down G Lower H Raise 5 91 1 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear 2 Pull the retainer through the wheel 3 Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft 4 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened 5 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench A to tighten the cable 5 92 Return the jack wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the Put the jack cover back on if you have one proper location behind the seat Secure the items A Bolt A Wheel Wrench B Cover
370. unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle Some top strap equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored Others require the top strap always to be anchored Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If yours requires that the top strap be anchored do not use the restraint unless it is anchored properly If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 37 Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor only one child restraint Attach
371. upants could drown Do not ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips e Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tireg on page 5 61 4 29 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 30 Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and energy See on page 4 31 Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own spec
372. ure is turned on the defogger will warm the mirrors to help clear them of snow or condensation The heated mirror feature will turn off automatically when the mirror is clear Storage Areas Glove Box To open your glove box lift the lever on the front of the glove box and lower the door The glove box should not be open while you are driving Overhead Console If your vehicle has this feature the overhead console includes reading lamps a compartment for a garage door opener a temperature and compass display and a storage compartment for sunglasses 2 33 Reading Lamps Press the button near each lamp to turn the reading lamps on and off The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the desired direction 2 34 Installing a Garage Door Opener 1 Open the compartment door by pressing the latch forward 2 Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener as close to the center of the opener as possible 3 Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button and press the opener firmly into place Now with the compartment door closed press the button again to make sure the garage door operates properly With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place you should only have to press the button lightly to operate the opener 4 The pegs inside the compartment door are
373. used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener 5 Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button 2 35 Temperature and Compass Display The outside air temperature and the compass are displayed at the front of the overhead console The buttons are located to the left of the display ON OFF Press this button to turn the display on or off US MET Press this button for the temperature to be displayed in either degrees Farenheit English or Celsius metric 2 36 Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower when you turn on the ignition the word ICE will appear on the display This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However when your vehicle is new the compass may function erratically If it does CAL Calibration will appear on the display To correct the calibration drive in a complete 360 circle three times and the compass will function normally Variance is the different between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great en
374. ushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will be automatically stored for that pushbutton a ON 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or to decrease The display will show the bass or the treble level If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust bass and treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL will appear on the display and you will hear a beep with the level display in the middle position AUTO TONE Automatic Tone Press this button to select customized equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical To return the bass and treble to the manual mode push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL is displayed Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers T
375. was one of your presets you may need to choose another station for that preset button No Info Artist Name Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this available channel Your system is working properly No Info Song Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this available channel Your system is working properly 3 68 XM Radio Messages cont d Radio Display i i Message Condition Action Required No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel Your system is working properly No Info No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this message available time on this channel Your system is working properly Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you the chosen category selected Your system is working properly XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If you receive this message after having your vehicle serviced check with the servicing facility Radio ID Radio ID label If you tune to channel 0 you will see this message channel 0 alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate your service Unknown Radio ID not known If you receive this message when you tune to chan
376. whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See Footnote Q Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 74 for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 9 000 Miles 15 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 12 000 Miles 20 000 km Q Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Q Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Q Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Ch
377. will appear beside that PTY on the display You may select multiple interrupts if desired When you are listening to a CD the last selected RDS station will interrupt play if that selected program type format is broadcast SCAN You can scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following 1 Press the P TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the P TYPE knob to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press and hold either SCAN arrow and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY 4 Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station If both PTY and TRAF are on the radio will scan for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements 3 65 BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn alternate frequency on press and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND again for two seconds AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When you turn the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will automatically be turned on This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio Service Setting Preset PTYs RDS Only The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
378. wo most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of its wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 42 4 42 Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT CENTER The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs 7 A ORIGINAL COLD TIRE f TIRE SIZE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER S A o ADDITIONAL po REAR ee A Vehicle Capacity Weight The Tire and Loading Information l
379. ws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section 4 52 Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer it s better not to use the highest gear Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer e the weight of the trailer tongue e and the weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehic
380. y The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it 4 32 Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid s the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades Are they in good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean e Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure e Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system
381. y be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 5 35 Engine Fan Noise This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch disengages 5 36 Power Steering Fluid The power steering reservoir is located near the front of the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location How to
382. y other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Radio with Cassette and CD meo EK TRAP Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL will appear on the display Each higher setting will allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed If you don t want to use automatic volume select OFF DISP Display Press this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time Time display is available with the ignition turned off For RDS press the DISP knob to change what appears on the display while using RDS The display options are station name RDS station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available To change th
383. you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it is steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can not make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Suppose after stalling try to back down the hill and decide just can not do it What should do Set the parking brake put your transmission in PARK P or the manual transmission in FIRST 1 and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you will want to consider a number of things e How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain
384. you in a collision You would see this label on the belt near the door opening If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag systems parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section 1 55 4 NOTES 1 56 Section 2 Features and Controls KEYS sssaci ce ttnsnareetedacaeiecaccateracdninbanwitacimaneectanetins 2 2 Automatic Transmission Operation 6 2 20 Remote Keyless Entry System 0 0 0e 2 3 Four Wheel Drive ccceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 22 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 2 4 Parking Brake srodan eE ah 2 25 Doors and Locks o on 2 6 Shifting Into Park P sseseseerereerererrreerereeres 2 26 Door Locke roe aa EE E 2 6 Shifting Out of Park P 0 2 28 Power Door Locks coise eeinetan 2 7 Parking Over Things That Burn s 2 29 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 0 60 2 7 Engine Exhaust eerren petteeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 29 Rear Door Security LOCKS ccccseeeeeeeneeeees 2 9 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked 2 30 Lockout Protection viieccnccdeotcssccsatesteasceeeeanadantne 2 9 Mirrors isa tice bicciabsnsteateg elas ccdecespes
385. you pull up on the shoulder belt O o gt SS o SS ANS a RS Ne J EEN rk aay The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 15 Q What s wrong with this A The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body Q What s wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong place You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What s wrong with this
386. you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement five day maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of 30 00 a day and must be supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Cou
387. your favorite PTYs These buttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press the P TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 3 66 3 Turn the P TYPE knob to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local or national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is muted or a CD is playing If a CD is playing play will stop during the announcement You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the whole message is not displayed parts of the message will appear every three seconds To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button repeatedly A new group of words will appear on the dis
388. zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories 3 27 Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away OC OW BRAKE Canada United States 3 28 This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 42 Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake sy

Brother J825DW Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents